· ARCHIVES i
SERIAL !
10
The University of Newcastle
FACULTY OF SCIENCE and MATHEMATICS
HANDBOOK
The University of Newcastle
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS
HANDBOOK
THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCAS1LE New South Wales
LocaUOD Address: Rankin Drive, Shortland
Postal Address: The University of Newcastle NSW. 2308
Telephone: (049) 680401
Telex: AA28194 - Ii"'"" AA28618 - Bursar
AA28784 - 1UNRA (The University of Newcastle Research Associates Limited)
Facsimile: (049) 601661
Hours of BusIness: Mondays to Fridays excepting public holidays 9 am to 5 pm
The University of Newcastle Calendar consists oftbe following volumes:
Volume 1
Volume 2
Volume 3
Volume 4
VolumeS
Volume 6
Volume 7
Volume 8
Volume 9
Volume 10
Volume 11
Legislation
University Bodies and Staff
Faculty of Architecture Handbook:
Faculty of Arts Handbook
Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook:
Faculty of Education Handbook
Faculty of Engineering Handbook
Faculty of Medicine Handbook:
Faculty of Science and Mathematics Handbook
Schools of Administration & Technology, Education, Health and Visual & Perfonning Arts Handbook
Faculty and Conservatorium of Music Handbook
Also available are the Undergraduate Guide and Postgraduate Prospectus
This volume is intended as a reference handbook for students enrolling in courses conducted by the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.
The colour band, Topaz BCC4, on the cover is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelors of Science of this University. The colour band, Amethyst Bee 28. in the center of the cover is the lining colour of the hood Bachelors of Mathematics of this University.
The information in this Handbook is correct as al15th November, 1989.
ISSN 1034 - 4489
Recommended Price: Four donars and fifty cents plus postage.
Designed by: Marie-TWisniowski
Typeset by: The Secretary's Division, The University of Newcastle
Printed by: Newey and Beath, Belford Street, Broadmeadow
THE DEAN'S FOREWORD
Welcome to the Faculty of Science and Mathematics. Amalgamation with the former Hunter Institute of Higher Education and the Newcastle Consetvatorium of Music took place on 1 November, 1989 and consequently there are many changes occurring in the University in physical location and in course diversity.
Commencing in 1990 the Regulations of all courses in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics are new and reflect the adoption of acredit point system and the move to semesterisation. This has resulted in changes to the content of all subjects. Accordingly, students need to carefully read the Regulations for their degree and the subject entry outlines contained in this Handbook. Great care will be needed when selecting appropriate combinations of subjects for your degree.
Students who are pursuing Mathematics orScience degree courses should be aware that they can apply to undertake subjects in Computer Science (offered within the Faculty of Engineering) but because of strict quota restrictions on entry to this subject, may not be successful. Statistics is also available (offered within the Faculty of Economics and Commerce) as a subject which could be pursued in the degree programme.
To the newly arriving students in Science and Mathematics may I offer a little advice. The system of instruction at university is vastly different from that in secondary schools. The onus is placed on the student to extract the maximum benefit from the COurse. University staff will lecture to you and during that time you are expected to make notes about the material being discussed. Some students respond by trying to take down the lecture verbatim but without understanding, others listen and make notes in outline form, copying down quotations or blackboard material, While a minority, overwhelmed by the volume and complexity of the subject matter, simply contemplate their next social engagement to their own disadvantage. Two things are important here. The first is the development of an efficient system of note taking and in this field the Student Counselling Unit provides short courses. The other is that, apart from tutorials and final
examinations, no one follows up your comprehension of the lecture material other than yourself. The faculty expects you to spend at least one hour of your own time on private study for every contact hour that you have with University staff. You need to allocate this time from the very beginning of your course and if you delay in starting, then the amount of time needed to catch up with your subjects will increase proportionately. A well planned, unifonn programme of work to support your lectures, to torials and laboratory classes will allow you the time to develop your understanding of the subjects and enjoy the many other facets of university life.
If this University has a heart it must surely reside in the Auchrnuty Library. The quality of your tertiary education depends upon your ability to make efficient use of this vital facility. Make sure you take part in the orientation programmes which the Library staff offerat the beginning of every year. Throughout your course the teaching staff of the University are here to guide you alongthe path of self-education and if you need assistance it is available at anumberoflevels. Difficulties with particular subjects should be discussed with the lecturer concerned or the Year Supervisor in the relevant Department. Problems with your degree structure and progression are the province of the Dean and Sub-Deans who will provide guidance when required. Day to day changes in your current enrolment are handled by the Faculty Secretary who can be found in the School Office in Room VI8 in the Mathematics Building.
In a climate where government charges for tertiary education have risen steeply, you must make the most of your time at University by using its resources to the full. Learn to organize your thoughts, expand your mind, and develop your critical faculties to the utmost in order to provide yourself with qualifications which will lead to a successful and satisfying career.
B.A. ENGEL, Dean
CONTENTS
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MA THEMA TICS
SECI10NONE FACULTY STAFF
SECI10NTWO FACULTY INFORMATION
SECI10NTHREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREEIDIPLOMA REGULATIONS
Undergraduate DlplomalDegrees offered In the Faculty General Regulations
Combined Degree Course Regulations Bachelbr or Science Bachelor or Science (psychology) Bachelor or Science (Aviation) Diploma in Aviation Science Bachelor or Mathematics (Ordinary)
Combined Degree Courses
SECI10N FOUR PROGRAMMES SUBJECT LIST
SECI10N FIVE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Guide to Undergraduate SUbject Entries
SECI10N SIX
Biological Sciences Chemistry Geology Mathematics Physics Aviation Psychology Computer Science Geography Information Science Statistics Additional Bachelor or Mathematics Subject Descriptions
POSTGRADUATE DEGREE REGULATIONS
Postgraduate Courses Doctor or Philosophy Bachelor of Science (Honours) Bachelor or Mathematics (Honours) Diploma In Coal Geology Diploma In Mathematical Studies Diploma In Psychology Diploma In Science Masters Degrees
Master of Mathematics Master of Psychology (Clinical)/Mas<er of Psychology (Educational) Master of Science Master of Scientific Studies
1
8
13
13 13 14 15 15 15 16 16 16
18 24
35
35 35 39 43 46 57 60 64 69 71 74 75 77
79
79 80 81 83 8S 8S 86 87 88 89 90 91 91
CONTENTS
SECI10N SEVEN POSTGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
SECI10N EIGHT LIST OF SUBJECTS
SECI10N NINE GENERAL INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL DATES 1990 (including Medicine) Advice and Information Faculty Secretaries
Accommodation Officer
Cashier's Office Careers and Student Employment Officer
Counselling Service
Health Service
Student Loans
Students with Special Needs Enrolment of New Students Transfer of Course Re-Enrolment by Continuing Students Re..Enrolment Kits
Lodging Application for Re·Enrolment Forms
Enrolment Approval
Payment of Charges
Late Payment Student Cards Re·Admission after Absence Attendance Status Change of Address Change of Name Change of Programme Withdrawal Confirmation of Enrolment Failure to Pay Overdue Debts Leave of Absence Attendance at Classes General Conduct Notices Student Matters Generally
EXAMINATIONS Examination Periods Sitting for Examinations Rules for Formal Examinations Examination Results Special Consideration
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS - REGULATIONS CHARGES
Method of Payment Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) Scholarship Holders and Sponsored Students Loans Refund of Charges
CAMPUS TRAFFIC AND PARKING
93
102
located between pages 42 and 43
II ii ii ii ii ii ii II
iii iii iii iii iii iii iii iii iii iii iii iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv iv v v
v v
v v
v vi
vii vii vii
viii viii viii viii
SECTION ONE
FACULTY STAFF
Dean B.A. Engel, MSc(NE), PhD
Sub-Deans
E.I. von Nagy-Felsobuki, BSc, PhD, DipEd(LaT), ARACI
W. Brisley. BSc(Syd), MSc(NSW), PhD, DipEd(NE)
Faculty Secretary H. R. Hotchkiss, BA, DipEd(NE)
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES Professor B. Boettcher, BSc, PhD(Adel) (Head of Department)
Associate Professors
R.C. Jones, BSc{NSW), PbD(Syd)
J.W. Patrick, BScAgr(Syd), PhD(Macq)
T.K. Roberts, BSc(Adel), PhD(F1in)
RJ. Rose, BScAgr(Syd), PhD(Macq)
Senior Lecturers B.A. Conroy, BSe, PhD(Syd)
R.N. Murdoch, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd)
I.e. Rodger, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd)
Lecturer C.E. Orner, BSc, PhD(Adel)
Researcb Associate M.R.Thomas, BSc, PhD
Honorary Associate I.D.Stanger, BSc (James Cook), PhD
SECfIONONE
Tutors M. Conroy, BSc, Dip Ed(Syc;l), PGDip Plant & Wildlife llIus(NCAE)
1. Fitter, BSc
I. Kyd, BSc(NSW), DipEd(Syd)
P. Lake, BSc, MSc(Tor)
Teaching Assistant K. Mate, BSc
Departmental Office Staff
D. Snushall
D. Jarvie
ProCessional Officers
D.l. Kay, BSc(Adel), PhD
J. Clulow, BSc, BA. PhD
Technical Officers
R. Campbell
RJ. Taylor
M.Lin
E. SlaTk
Laboratory Craflsperson M. Ward
Laboratory Assistants
D.L. Brennan
T.D. Frost
E.D. Murray
LD.Pezely
K. Stokes
DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY ProCessors
K.J. Morgan, BSc, MA, DPhil(OxO (Personal Chair)
W.F.J. Pickering, MSc, PhD(NSW), DSc, ASTC, FRACI
Associate ProCessors
LX. Dyall, MSc,PhD(Melb), FRACI
L.A. Summers, BSc, PhD(Glas}, FRACI
Senior Lecturers
K.H. Bell, BSc, PhD(NSW), FRACI (Head oCDepartment)
R.A. Fredlein, BSc, PhD(Qld}, ARACI
G.A. Lawrance, BSc, PhD(Qld}, DipEd(Melb), FRACI
E.!. von Nagy-Felsobuki, BSc, PhD, DipEd(LaT), ARACI
Ledurers
R.C. Bums, BSc, PhD(Melb), ARACI
M. Maeder, PhD (Basel)
Senior Tutor G.L. Orr, BSc(Qld), PhD(NSW), ARACI
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
Honorary Research Associate D.AJ. Swinkels, BSc(NSW), PhD(penn), ASTC, FRACI
2
SECfIONONE
DepartmentaJ Office Staff
E. Siabbert
M.Munns
ProCessional Officer Vacant
Technical Officers
A.I. Beveridge
R.F. Godfrey
J. Slavek
W.J. Thompson
Laboratory Assistant T Williams
DEPARTMENT OF GEOWGY ProCessor I.R. Plimer, BSc(NSW), PhD(Macq) (Head oCDepartment)
Associate ProCessors
CP.K. Diessel, DiplGeoI, DrRerNat(Berlin), AAusIMM, FAIE
BA Engel, MSc(NE), PhD
Senior Lecturers
R. Orner, BSc, PhD(Adel)
P.K. Seccombe, MSc(Melb), PhD(Manit)
Lecturer W. Collins, BSc(ANU), PhD (Lan
Honorary A:;soclate
M.R. Salehi, BSc(Tehran), PhD (N'cle,UK)
Departmental Office Staff G. MacKenzie
Professional Officer G.L. Dean-Jones, MSc(Macq)
Technical Officers
R. Bale, BSc
E. Krupic
JA. Crawford
Laboratory Assistant W.H. Crehert
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS Professor Vacant
AssOciate Profe&'lors
W. Brisley, BSc(Syd), MSc (NSW), PhD, DipEd(NE)
CA. Croxton, BSc(Leicester), MA, PhD(Camb), PAIP, FInstP(Lond)
J.R. Giles, BA(Syd), PhD, DipEd(Syd), ThL
P.K. Smrz, PromPhys, CSc, RNDr(Charles(Prague» (Head of Department)
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
3
SECfIONONE
Senior Lecturers
B. Sims BSc, PhD
W.T.F. Lau, ME(NSW), PhD{Syd)
D.L.S. McElwain, BSc(Qld), PhD(York(Cant». MACS
W.P. Wood, BSc, PhD(NSW), FRAS
Lecturers I.M. Benn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Lancaster)
R.F. Berghoul, MSc(Syd)
J.O. Couper, BSc, PhD(NE)
I.A. MacDougall, BSc(Dalhousie), MA(Dalhousie), MPhil(Waterloo)
W. Summerfield, BSc(Adel), PhD(Flin)
E. Vlachynsky, BSc(Syd), PhD(Syd)
Senior Tutor R. Buchholz, BMath
Tutors S. Boswell, BMath
N.E. Hannah, BMath(Hons)
S. Seiffert BMath
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
Professor Emeritus R.o. Keats, BSc, PhD(Adel), DMath(Waterloo), PIMA, FASA, MACS
Departmental Secretary J. Garnsey, BA(Syd)
L. Steel
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS Professor R.I. MacDonald, BSc, PhD(NSW), PAIP
Associate Professors
BJ. Fraser, MSc(NZ), PhD(Cant), PAIP, FRAS(Head of Department)
C.S.L. Keay, MSc(NZ), PhD(Cant), MA(Tor). CPhys, PIP, PAIP, FAAAS, FRNZAS, FRAS, MACS
P.V. Smith, BSc, PhD(Monash), MAIP
Senior Lecturers
P.T. Bagnall, BSc(NSW), MSc(NE), PhD, MAIP
1.E.R. Cleary, MSc(NSW)
P.A. McGovern, BE, BSc(Qld), MS, PhD(CaITech), MIEEE, SMIREAust
D.l. O'Connor, BSc, PhD(ANU), PAIP
Rll. Roberts, BE(NSW), MSc, ASTC
Lecturers
B.V. King, BSc, BE, PhD(NSW)
P.W. Menk, BSc, PhD(LaT), MAIP
Research Associates
B.1. O'aig, BMath, PhD
H.J. Hansen, MSc, PhD(Natal)
A. Kahn, MSc, MS, PhD(Illinois, USA)
M. Kato, BSc, MS, PhD(Waseda, Tokyo)
Honorary Research Associates
D. Webster, BSc, PhD
l.A. Ramsay, MSc(Melb), PhD, PAIP
4
SECfIONONE
Departmental Omce Staff
E. Cadell
T. Cameron
J.Oyston
Computer Programmer A. Nicholson
professional Officer Vacant
Senior Technical Officers
B.Mason
M.K.O'Neill
I.F. Pearson
I.S. Ratcliffe
Technical Officers
T.W.Bums
M.M. Cvetanovski
I.e. Foster
F. McKenzie
I.F. Pearson
Senior Laboratory Craftsperson B. Stevens
Laboratory Craftsperson P. Greig
AVIATION PROGRAMME
PACUL TY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMA TICS STAfF
Associate Professor R.A. Telfer, BA(NSW), MEdAdmin(NE), PhD, DipEdAdmin(NE), (DIrector, Institute of Aviation)
Lecturers
I. Henley, BEd(Alberta), MA(Alberta), MEd(Manitoba)
D. Christley, BA(Macq)
Senior Research Assistant M.J. Ross,BA(Melb), GradDipAppPsych(Chisholm)
Institute Omce Staff S. Petrov
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY Professor M.G. King, BA, PhD(Qld), PAPsS, MAPsS
ASSOCiate Professors
D.C. Finlay, MSc, PhD(Melb), MAPsS, (Head of Department)
D.M. Kea<" BA(Syd), MEd, PhD(Qld), DipEd(Syd), FAP,s, MSAANZ
Senior Lecturers
M.M. Conon, MA, PhD(NE), MAPsS
R.A. Heath, BSc, PhD(McM)
M. Hunter, BSc, PhD(Lond), CertEd, MBPsS, MAPsS
N.F. Kat"" BA, PhD(ANU), MAP,s
1. Kenardy, BSc, PhD(Qld»
D. Munro, MA(Manc), PhD(Lond), CertSocSt(Glas), DipData(SA),MAPsS
H.P. Pfister, BA(Macq), PhD, MAPsS, AAIM
I.L Seggie, BA, PhD
I.D.C. Shea, MA(Cont), PhD(Qld) MASH, MASSERT, MACPCP
5
SECfIONONE
Lecturers CE. Lee, BA, PhD(Adel), MAP.s
S.A. McFadden. BA, PhD(ANU)
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
Emeritus Professor I.A. Keats, BSc(Adel), BA(Melb), AM, PhD(Prin), FASSA, FBPsS, FAPsS
Honorary Associates
M. Arthur, BA, D;pP,!,ch(Syd), MHP(NSW), MAP.s
D.B. Dunlop, MB, BS(Syd), DO, FRSM, MACO
B. Fenelon. BA(Qld), MA, PhD, MAPsS. AAAN. MSPR
I. Miles, BA. PhD F.V. Smith, MA(Syd), PhD(Lond), FBPsS
1.W. Staines, BA, BEc(Syd), BEd(Melb), PhD(Lond), MBPsS, FAPsS
Departmental Office StafT W.N.Mead
H. Finegan S. Harris
Professional Officer Rl. Price, BSc, PhD
Senior Technical Officers
R.Gleghom
A.O. Harcombe
L. Cooke
Technical Officers
H. Daniel, BE E.M.Huber
1. Lee·Chin
K.A. Shannon, BA
P.W.Smith
Laboratory Crallsperson M. Newton
DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY Professor EA. Colhoun, BA(Belf), MS(Wis), PhD(BeIQ. MA(Dub) (Head of Department)
Associate Professors I.C.R. Camm, MSc(Hull). PhD
D.N. Parkes, BA(Dunelm), MA, PhD
Senior Lecturers
H.A. Bridgman, BA(Beloit), MA(Hawaii), PhD(Wis)
M.R. Hall, MA(Manc)
W.1.A. 10005, BA(NSW), MA, PhD(PNO), DipEd(NSW)
RJ. Loughran, BSc(Dunelm), MSc, PhD(NE)
J.C. Thmer, BScAgr(Syd), MS, PhD(Wis)
Lecturers
K.W. Lee, BA(Liv), MA(NE)
a.N. McIntyre, BA(Tas), MA(ANU), PhD
6
SECfIONONE
Honorary Associates
BL.Campbell, MSc Honoris causa
W.P. Geyl, BSc(Lond), DrsPhysGeog(Ulrecht)
Departmental Office StatT M.B.Lane
Cartographer CJ.Harden
Technical Officer N. G. Gardner
Computer Programmer RJ.Dear
Map Librarian A.M. Haynes
DEPARTMENT OF STATISTICS
Professor AJ. Dobson, BSc(Adel), MSc, PhD(James Cook) (Head or Department)
Associate Professor R.W. Gibberd, BSe, PhD(Adel)
Senior Lecturers
B.O. Quinn, BA, PhD(ANU)
D.P. Sinclair, BSc, MSrat(NSW), MS, PhD(FIorida State)
Lecturer
A.L. Pope, MSc(Syd), MSc(ANU), PhD(Lond)
StaUsttcal Programmer C. Thitkettle, BComm, DipCompSc
Departmental Secretary C. Claydon
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
7
SECTION TWO
FACULTY INFORMATION
The Faculty of Science and Mathematics comprises the Departments of Biological Sciences, Chemistry. Geology. Mathematics, Physics and Psychology. The Departments of Electrical Engineering & Computer Science, Geography and Statistics also offer major sequences of quaIif ying subjects f orthe degrees of Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of Mathematics in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.
Transition Arrangements This section on transition arrangements only applies to students enrolled before 1990.
From 1990 there are new Regulations Governing the Bachelor of Mathematics, Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Science (Psychology) Degrees and the Diploma in A~ation Science offered in the Faculty of Science and Matherna11cs.
Conversion Patterns For 1990
Transition for current students to the new credit point system requires conversion by the following formula:
Part 1 subjects - 12 credit points
Part n subjects - 18 credit points
Part ill subjects - 24 credit points
Examples:
4-3-2 Pattern 5-2-2 Pattern
100 level
Chemistry I 12 Physics lA 12
Biology I 12 Geology I 12
Mathematics I 12 Chemistry I 12
Geography I 12 Biology I 12 Japanese I 12
48 60
8
200 level
Chemistry ITA 18 Geology TIA 18
Chemistry TIB 18 Geology TIB 18
Biology IIA 1Ji 54 36
300 level
Biology lilA 24 Geology lIlA 24
Chemistry rnA 24 Geology llIB 24
48 48
Total 150 Total 144
It should be noted that in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics any candidate who enrolled under regulations prior to 1990 is to meet the requirements of regUlations, including the equivalent of the specific nine subject degree pattern (4-3-2 or 5-2-2), in existence when the candidate commenced the course.
Exceptional Circumstances Arising in Transition
In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular transition cases the Dean may determine the transition
program 10 be followed.
General Information for New Undergraduates Students embarking on a university course for the first time ~ay find some difficulty in adapting to the new environment. Tertiary., education makes a number of demands on students: it requires ; them to be self.disciplined, organized, self·motivated ~d i moreover, responsible for their own course of study. He~ce l~ IS ~ important that students become familiar with the Uroverslty ,! structure degree courses offered and service organizations (such 1 aslhe university CounsellingService &AccommodationServict j etc.) which offer assistance with study, personal and housing i problems. ij
I
SECfIONTWO
Often students onfirst entering University are not certain of their final field of interest. In fact, it is usually anI y afterthecompletion of the first year of study that many students finally choose to major in a particular subject. In order to maintain flexibility first year semester subjects (100 level subjects) should be chosen from areas where the student has some previous expertise or special interest. At the same time, they should take note of the degree requirements, particularly with regard 10 compulsory subjects, advisory/compulsory prerequisites and corequisites as set oul in the appropriate degree/diploma regUlations in this handbook.
Students should note that degrees must be structured to include a specified number of 300 level semester subjects. Forexample, aBachelor of Sciencedegree must include four3oo level semester subjects in one Department, and at least four more 300 level semester SUbjects chosen from those approved by Faculty Board. Subject to the Dean's permission, a candidate for the degree of BachelorofScienceis, in general, permitted to enrol in upl0 nine semester subjects from amongst thoseoffered by another Faculty. Similarly, a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Psychology) may count up to four semester subjects offered in other degree courses and a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Mathematics may enrol in up to eight semester subjects from another Faculty.
Time limits are set on the duration of an undergraduate course as indicated in the appropriate regUlations. Maximum workloads are also preset, since limits are placed on the number of subjects students are pennittedto undertake in anyone year. Forinfonnation on these restrictions consult the appropriate degree regulations.
Undergraduate Admission Requirements (1) In order to be considered for admission for any qualification
otherthan a postgraduate qualification an applicant shall be required to:
(a) either:
(i) attain such aggregate of marks in approved subjects tJl the one New South Wales Higher School Certificate examination as may be prescribed by the Senate from time to time; or
(ii) otherwise satisfy the Admissions Committee that the student has reached a standard of education sufficient to enable pursuit of the approved course; and
(b) satisfy any prerequisites prescribed for admission 10 the course leading to that qualification.
(2) The aggregate of marks prescribed by the Senate shall be determined by aggregating the marks gained in up to 10 units or, where more than 10 units are presented, the 10 units having the highest marks.
Advisory Prerequisites for Entry to the Faculty There are no prescribed prerequisites for entry to the Faculty of Science and Mathematics; students are advised that lectures will commence on the assumption that all students will have achieved the leVel indicated.
Subject
Biology 101
FACULTY INFORMATION
Advisory prerequisites
Higher School Certificate Chemistry or 4~ unit Science is appropriate and students are advised to include CHEM101 and CHEMI02in their University programme. However, some lectures in background chemistry will be offered by the Depart.. ment of Community Programmes prior to the start of the first semester. Attendance at this Preparatory Course is optional.
Chemistry 101 At least Mathematics (2~unit course), Chemistry (2·unit course), and Physics (2· unit course), with ranking in thetop50%in each case.
Geology 101 2·units of Science (preferably Chemistry) and at least 2·units of Mathematics.
Mathematics 101 Mathematics (2·unit course), or higher.
Mathematics 102 Mathematics at 3·unit level with a scare of at least 110/150 in 3-unit, or have passed Mathematics 101
Physics 101 HSC 2·unit Mathematics with a performance level in the top 30% of the candidature for this subject. While this is an advisory prerequisite in 1990, il will become mandatory in 1991.
Physics 102 HSC 3·unit Mathematics mark of at least 110/150. Physics 2·unit or Science 4·unit with a performance level in the top 50% of candidature for these SUbjects. While these are advisory prerequisites in 1990 the y will become mandatory in 1991.
Aviation 101-104 2·unit, 3·unitor4·unitMathematics. Also, 2·unit Physics or 4·unit Science (including the Physics 'make·up· electives) with a level of perfonnance placing them in the top 50% of the candidature for these subjects.
Mature Age Entry
Entry into the University is available to persons who will be at least 21 years of age by 1st March of the year in which enrolment is sought and who have completed a limited New South Wales HigherSchool Certificate Programme. Subjects which will enable entry into the Faculty of Science and Mathematics include four units selected from Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics (3~unit course preferred), and 4·unit Science. For entry into the Bachelor ofMathematicsdegree.include2-unitmathematics(3·unitcourse preferred} and one other subject recognised for admission purposes. The subjects should be presented as 2·unit courses with a result in the top 50%.
Limit on Admission
Where the Council is of the opinion that a limit should be placed upon the number of persons who may in any year be admitted to a course or part of a course or to the University, -it may impose
9
SECfIONTWO
such a limit and determine the manner of selection of those persons to,be so admitted.
Enrolment Requirements
(a) In order to be admitted an applicant shall:
(i) satisfy appropriate Diploma/Degree Regulations as set out in Section 1bree;
(ti) receive approval to enrol;
(ill) complete the prescribed enrolment procedures; and
(iv) pay any fees and charges prescribed by the Council.
(b) An applicant may be admitted under such conditions as the Admissions Committee may determine after considering any advice offered by the Dean of the Faculty.
(e) Except with the approval of the Faculty Board a candidate for a qualification shall nol enrol in a subject which does not count towards that qualification.
(d) A candidate for a qualification shall not enrol in a course or part of a courseforanotherqualification unless thecandidate has first obtained the consent ofthe Dean of the Faculty and, if another Faculty is responsible for the course leading to that otberqualification, the Dean of that Faculty: provided that a student may enrol in a combined degree course approved by the Senate leading to two qualifications.
(e) A candidate for any qualification otber than a postgraduate qualification who is enrolled in three quarters or more of a normal full-time programme shall be deemed to be a fulltime student whereas a candidate enrolled in either a parttime course or less than three-quarters of a full-time programme shall be deemed to be a part-time student
Enrolment Status
A candidate for a qualification shall enrol as either a full-time student or a part-time student.
Combined Degree Courses The decision to take a combined degree course is usually taken at the end of a student's first year in his original degree course, in consultation with the Deans of the Faculties responsible for the two degrees. Permission to embark on a combined degree course will nonnally require an average of credit levels in first year subjects.
Non-Degree Students
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in these . Regulations, the Admissions Committee may on the recommendation of the Head of a Department offering any part of acourse permit a person, not being a candidate for aqualificatiCll of the University, to enrol in any yearinthat part of the course on payment of such fees and charges as may be prescribed by the Council. A person so enrolling shall bedesignateda 'non-degree' student.
10
FACULTY INFORMATION
Faculty Policy in Regard to Standing for Courses Completed Elsewhere The Faculty Board may grant standingin specified and unspecified semester subjects, aggregating to amaximum of 60 credit points, to a candidate in recognition of work completed in this university or another approved tertiary institution, on conditions determined by the Faculty Board. Such standing to be granted may include no more than 48 points at 100 level, 24 points at 200 level and 12 points at 300 level.
Additional Information Advisory Services
Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of subjects in the course should seek help from members of the Faculty. In particular, advice should be sought from first, second and third year subject co-ordinators in each Department, Heads of Departments, the Sub-Deans or Dean.
Enquiries regarding enrolment, variation to programme and general administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary in the School of Science and Mathematics in the Mathematics Building (Room V1S).
For personal counselling and study skills training it is suggested that students should consult the University Counselling Service.
Student Participation in University Affairs
Provision is made for students to be elected as members on Departmental and Faculty Boards as well as to other University bodies. Election of student members usually takes place early in first term and students should watch Departmental notice boards for details of election of student members.
The Faculty Board of the Faculty of ScienceandMathematicshas provision for the election of four student members.
SUbject Timetable Clashes
Students are strongly advised to check on possible timetable clashes before enrolling. Clashes may f oree students to take those subjects in different years. Although academic staff are always willing to advise students, it is the student's responsibility to ensure that chosen subjects may be studied concurrently. Science and Mathematics students taking subjects from other Faculties must examine the timetable to ensure that clashes do not exist in their proposed courses.
Although the timetable for one particular subject may clash with 1
that of another, this may notnecessarily mean that. this combination j cannot bedone. Often an arrangement can be made by oneorboth j Departmental representatives to overcome this problem. { Therefore, see the Departmental representatives before deciding } upon your final subject combinations. 1
j , Workload 1
The expected maximum workload for students devoting most of ~ their time to degree studies is four subjects (24 credit points) per ~ semester. In the case of subjects offered over afull year (12 credit i points), the workload will berated as 6 credit points per semester. ,
SECfIONTWO
Enrolment in excess of 24 credit points per semester can only be exceeded in exceptional circumstances by students with a good academic record and requires the permission of the Dean.
Students with external commitments, such as part-time employment, should enrol in fewer subjects. Such commitments cannot be taken into consideration for an extension of time for written work, or failure to attend examinations s"ome of which may be scheduled on Saturday mornings.
Student Academic Progress
All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory progress and, in particular, attention is drawn to the Regulations Governing Unsatisfactory Progress. The follOwing should be borne in mind:
1. The Faculty Board requires that students shall pass at least two semester subjects in their first year of full-time attendance or in their first two years of part-time attendance.
2. The Faculty Board requires that students shall have passed at least eight semester subjects by the end of the first two years of full-time attendance or four years of part-time attendance.
3. The Faculty Board has determined that a student who fails a semester subject twice shall not be permitted to include that subject in the candidate's future programme, and that a student who fails four semester subjects twice shall be excluded from further enrolment in the Faculty, unless the candidate shows cause to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board why the candidate should be permitted to do so.
4. Students should note that a terminating pass can be awarded only at the 100 level or 200 level and that no more than four terminating passes may count in a student's programme (with no more than two at the 200 level.)
~ote: Whe~ there is a change in attendance status, two parttime years will be taken as the equivalent of one full-time year for the purposes of this policy.
Examinations Regulations
These regulations are printed in the centre grey pages of this Handbook.
Unsatisfactory Progress
Additional regUlations are printed in the centre grey pages of this Handbook.
Record of Failure
~ .ap~licant who has a record of failure at another tertiary mStitutlOn shall not be admitted unless that applicant first satisfies
(a) the Faculty Board or the Doctoral Degree Committee for the Faculty as appropriate, in the case of a postgraduate qUalification; or
(b) the Admissions Committee, in the case of any other qualification;
that there is a reasonable prospect that the applicant will make satisfactory progress.
FACULTY INFORMATION
Re-enrolment
A candidate for a qualification shall be required to re-enrol annually during the period of this candidature. Upon receiving approval to re-enrol the candidate shaIl complete the prescribed procedures and pay the fees and charges determined by the Council not later than the date prescribed for payment.
Teacher Training Courses Prerequisites for Diploma in Education Units
Students who intend to proceed to a Diplomain Education should familiarise themselves with the prerequiSites for units offered in the course.
These prerequisites are staled in terms of subjects of the Universil y of Newcastle. Applicants whose courses of study have included subjects which are deemed for this purpose to provide an equivalent foundation may be admitted to the Diploma course as special cases.
In ~e Diploma course the Problems in Teaching, and Learning uruts are grouped as follows:
(a) Secondary:
English
History
Social Science (Geography,Commerce, Social Science) Mathematics
Science
Modem Languages (French, German, Japanese)
(b) Primary
Prerequisites
For information about prerequisites, students are invited to contact the Faculty Secretary. Faculty of Education, Ext.417, Room W329.1bis contact should be made in the early stages of a degree course.
All secondary methods
Normally at least 30 credit points (12-100;18-200 level) of a degree in the main teaching area and 12 credit points (12-100 level) of a degree in any subsidiary area Modem Languages, Drama, Science and Social Sciences have additional specific requirements.
Primary method
At least 30 credit points (12-100;18-200 level) of a degree in a specified area and 12-100 level credit points of a degree in each of two others. The specified areais usually a secondary teaching area
Further details may be obtained from the Faculty Secretary, Faculty of Education, ext.417, Room W329.
Mathematics Education Subjects
Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Mathematics intending a career in teaching may wish to include professional studies related directly to teaching in addition to, and concurrently with,
11
SECfIONTWO
the normal course of study in the second and third years by enrolling in Mathematics Education II and Mathematics Education m. the contents of which are set out under Extraneous Subjects.
Role of Faculty Board, Faculty of Scieuce and Mathematics The role of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics is defined by By·Law 24.4, which states:
"Subject to the authority of the Council and the Sena1eand to any resolution thereof, a Faculty Board shall:
(a) encourageandsupervisetheteachingandresearchactivities of the Faculty;
(b) detennine the nature and extent of examining in the subjects in the courses of study for the degrees and diplomas in the Faculty;
(c) detennine the grades of pass to be awarded and the conditions for gaining deferred or special examinations in respect of the subjects in the courses of study for the degrees and diplomas in the Faculty;
(d) detennine matters concerning admissions, enrolment and progression in the courses of study for the degrees and diplomas in the Faculty and make recommendations on such of those matters as require consideration by the Admissions Committee;
(e) consider the examination results recommended in respect of each ofthe candidates for the degrees and diplomas in the Faculty and take action in accordance with the Examination Regulations made by Council under By-Law 5.9.1;
(f) deal with any matter referred to it by Senate;
(g) make recommendations to Senate on any matter affecting the Faculty;
(h) exercise such other powers and duties as may from time to time be delegated to it by the Council".
Professional Recognition Graduates of the University of Newcastle enrolled in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics are recognized by a number of different professional societies dep ending on their degree majors.
Biological Sciences
The Australian Institute of Biology Incorporated was inaugurated in 1986. Its objectives are to represent the Biology profession in Australia, to promote education and research in Biology and to improve communication between Biologists of different disciplines. The Institute confers on its members a status similar to that for other Australian professional institutes. Membership grades are: Fellow, Member, Associate and Student. Members and Fellows are able to indicate this by the appropriate letters after their qualifications. Fellowship requires distinction in Biology and nomination from the existing membership. Membership requires a first or second class honours degree in Biology and three years relevant experience, or a pass degree with five years experience, or a Masters degree with two years
12
FACULTY INFORMATION
relevantexperience,oraPhD.AnAssociaterequiresanappropriate pass degree or contribution to the advancement of Biology.
Chemistry
Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science(Honours) majoring in Chemistry, may join the Royal Australian Chemical Institute which has several categories of membership according to qualification and experience.
Geology
Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science(Honours) majoring in Geology may join the Geological Society of Australia Inc., the Australian Institute of Geoscientists and The Australasian Institute of Mining & Metallurgy which has several categories of membership according to qualification and experience.
Mathematics
For employment as a Mathematician, graduates should have at least one majorin Mathematics. An Honours degree is preferred by many employers. The profession is represented by the Australian Mathematical Society.
Physics
Foremployment as a physicist, students musthaveaminimum of an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major in Physics. An honours degree in Physics orcombined PhysicsjMathematics would be preferred.
Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian Institute of Physics. Membership is limited to graduates with a minimum of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of Physics has a number of grades of membership which are related to experience as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors courses in Physics at tertiary institutions and judges them in tenns of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian Institute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of physicists to matters relating to physicists and their role. There are no fonnal conditions for registration as a physicist.
Psychology
Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science majoringin Psychology or a Bachelor of Science(psychology) may join the Australian Psychological Society. Membership nonnally requires a four year degree in psychology. Provision is also made for Student Subscribers and Affiliates.
SECTION THREE
,UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE/DIPLOMA REGULATIONS
Undergraduate DiplomalDegrees offered in the Faculty of Scieuce and Mathematics Bachelor of Science
Bachelor of Science (Aviation)
Diploma of Aviation
Bachelor of Science (Psychology)
Bachelor of Mathematics
Regulations Governing the Ordinary Bachelor Degrees offered in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics Part I - General Regulations 1. General
These regulations prescribe the conditions and requirements relating to the degrees of Bachelor of Science, BaChelor of Science (Aviation), Bachelor of Science (Psychology) and Bachelor of Mathematics of the University of Newcastle and are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-law 5.2.1.
2. Definitions
In these Regulations, Schedules and Ustsattached thereto, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicate or require:
"course" f means a group 0 semester subjects selected in confonnity with the conditions prescribed for each degree;
"the Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty;
"the degree" means the degree of Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Science (Aviation), Bachelor of Science (psychology) and Bachelor of Mathematics as the case may be;
"Department" means the department offering a particular semester subject or various combinations thereof and includes any other body so doing;
"Faculty" means the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;
"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty;
"SChedule" means the Schedule to these Regulations relevant to the course in which a person is enrolled or proposing to enrol;
"semester subject" means any programme of study which aggregates to a total of 6 (six) credit points and for which aresult may be recorded. For the purpose of this definition two 3 (three) credit point subjects can be equated to one semester subject. Semester subjects shall be classified as 1 00, 200, 300 or400 level by the Faculty Board.
3. Admission
An applicant for admission to candidature shall satisfy the requirements of the Regulations Governing Admission and Enrolment and such other additional requirements as may be specified in the appropriate degree Schedules and Subject Lists.
4. Enrolment
(I) In any semester, a candidate shall enrol only in those semester subjects or their equivalent approved by the Dean or the Dean's nominee.
(2) Except with the approval of the Dean, given only if the Deanis satisfied that the academic merit of the candidate so
13
SECTION TIlREE
warrants, a candidate shall not enrol in more than four semester subjects or their equivalent in anyone semester.
(3) A candidate may not enrol in any semester in any combination of semester subjects which is incompatible with the requirements of the timetable for that semester.
5. Prerequisites and Corequisites
(1) The Faculty Board, on therecommendalion of the Head of Department, may prescribe prerequisites and/or corequisites for any semester subject offered by that Department.
(2) Except with the approval of the Faculty Board, granted after considering any recommendation made by the Head of the Department, no candidate may enrol in a semester subject unless that candidate has satisfied its prerequisites and has already passed or concurrently enrols in or is already enrolled in any semester subject prescribed as its corequisite.
6. Semester SUbject
(1) Tocompleteasemester subject orits equivalent, acandidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars, laboratory classes and field-work and submit such written or other work as the Department or Departments shall require.
(2) To pass a semester subject or its equivalent, a candidate shall complete all requirements and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.
(3) Theresults obtained by asuccessful candidate in a semester subject or its equivalent shall be: High Distinction, Distinction, Credit, Pass, or Tenninating Pass.
7. Standing
(1) The Faculty Board may grant standing in specified and unspecified semester subjects, aggregating to a maximum of 60 credit points, to a candidate in recognition of work completed in this university or another approved tertiary institution, on conditions detennined by the Faculty Board. Such standing to be granted may include no more than 48 points at 100 level, 24 points at 200 level and 12 points at 300 level.
(2) A candidate may not present for the degree studies which have been counted previously towards a degree or diploma to which the candidate has been admitted or is eligible for admission, except to such extent as the Faculty Board may detennine.
(3) Notwithstanding anything hereinbefore contained, a candidate who has satisfied all the requirements of the course leading to the award of the Diploma in Aviation Science of this University may be granted standing in all semester subjects passed in that course for entry into the Bachelor of Science degree programme.
8. Withdrawal
(1) A candidate may withdraw from asubject or the course only by infonning the Secretary to the University in writing and
14
ORDINARY BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.
(2) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted pennission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty. The relevant date shall be:
(a) in the case of semester subjects offered only in the first semester, the Monday of the 9th week of first semester;
(b) in thecaseof any semester subject offered only in the secondsemester, the Monday ofthe9th week of second semester;
(c) in the case of two semester subjects offered jointly over the duration of two consecutive semesters, the Monday of the 3rd week of the second semester.
9. Time Requirements
(1 ) Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the requirements for an ordinary degree within eighteen semesters, or for the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) honours degree within twenty two semesters from the commencement of the course. A candidate who has been granted standing in recognition of work completed elsewhere shall be deemed to have commenced the degree course from a date to be detennined by the Dean.
(2) Upon request by a candidate, the Faculty Board may grant leave of absence from the course. Such leave shall not be taken into account in calculating the qualifying period for a semester subject or the degree.
Part II - Combined Degree Course Regulations 10. A candidate may complete the requirements for the degree in conjunction with another Bachelor's degree by completing a combined course approved by the Dean or the Deans of the two Faculties as the case may be.
11. Admission to a combined degree course-
(a) shall be subject to the approval of the Dean or Deans of the two Faculties as the case may be.
(b) shall, except in exceptional circumstances, be after the successful completion of 48 credit points of their current degree enrolment; and
(c) shall be restricted to candidates with an average of at least Credit Grade.
12. The work undertaken by a candidate in a combined degree course shall be no less in quantity and quality than if the two courses were taken separately and shall be certified by the Dean or Deans of the two Faculties as the case may be.
13. To qualify for admission to the two degrees, acandidate shaD satisfy the requirements for both degrees except as provided in the Schedule for combined degrees.
SECfION THREE
Part m - Exceptional Circumstances 14. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the Senate on the Recommendation of the Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these Regulations.
SCHEDULE I - BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
1. To qualify for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Science, a candidate shall pass at least twenty four (24) semester subjects, approved by the Faculty Board, for a credit point score of at least 144 points.
2. The semester subjects or their equivalent presented for the degree shall consist of:
(a) at least six 100, six 200 and eight 300 level semester SUbjects chosen from those approved by the Faculty Board. For the purpose of this regulation, two 3 credit point subjects are considered to be the equivalent of a semester subject.
(b) at least two 100 level semester subjects from each of three Departments in the FaCUlty. Approved semester subjects for the purpose of this regulation shall include:
Biology 101/102, Chemistry 101/102, Geography 101/ 102, Geology 101/1 02, Mathematics 101/102 or 102/103, Physics 101/102 or 102/103, and Psychology 101/102.
(c) two 100 level, three 200 level and four 300 level semester subjects in one department of the Faculty, chosen from those offered by the Departments of Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography, Geology, Physics, andPsychology.
(d) not more than 96 credit points from anyone Department; and
(e) 300 level semester subjects from no more than three Departments in the University.
3. A candidate may select no more than nine semester subjects or equivalent (54 credit points) from those offered in courses leadingto other degrees of the University, with the pennission of the Dean who shall determine the classification of each semester subject at the 100, 200 or 300 level.
SCHEDULE2- BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (AVIATION)
1. To qualify for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Science (Aviation), a candidate shall pass at least twenty four (24) semester subjects, approved by the Faculty Board, for a credit point score of atlcast 144 points, in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) 36creditpointsfromAviation 101, 102, 104, 105, 106, 108;
(b) 30 credit points from Aviation 201, 202, 204.205,206;
(c) 24 credit points from Aviation 301, 302, 303, 304;
(d) 12 credit points from either Aviation 103 and 101 or Psychology 101 and 102; or other approved 100 level subjects;
(e) 18 credit points from Psychology 201, 202, and 203; or Geography 201, 203 and 204; or other approved 200 level SUbjects; and
ORDINARY BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
(f) 24 credit points from Psychology 300 level, Geography 300 level or other approved 300 level subjects.
SCHEDULE 3 - BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (pSYCHOLOGy)
1. TheBachelorofScience (psychology) may be conferred either as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree. For the honours degree there shall be three classes of honours: Qass I, Class IT and Class III. Class IT shall have two divisions, namely Divisionland Division II.
2. To qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Science (psychology), a candidate shall pass at least twenty four (24) level 100 to 300 semester subjects (144 credit points) approved by the Faculty Board, combined with either Psychology 401 and 402 or Psychology 403 and 404 (48 credit points) for a total credit point score of at least 192 points. Of these, 48 points shall come from subjects at the 400 level, atleast48 from subjects at the300 level, at least 36 from subjects at the 200 level, and at least 36 from subjects at the 100 level.
3. Semester subjects or their equivalent presented for the degree shall include:
(a) 12 credit points from Psychology 101 and 102;
(b) 30 credit points from Psychology 201. 202, 203, 204, 205, and 206;
(c) 24 credit points from Psychology 301, 302, 303, and 305;
(d) 48 creditpointsfrom Psychology 401 and4020r Psychology 403 and 404;
(e) at least 24 credit points from two 100 level semester subjects from each oft wo other Departments in the Faculty. Approved semester subjects forthe purposeofthisregulation shall include:
Biology 101/102, Chemistry 101/102, Geography 101/ 102, Geology 101/102, Mathematics 101/102 or 102/103, and Physics 101/102 or 1021103; and
(f) at least 24 credit points from other approved semester subjects at the 300 level.
4. Entry to Psychology 401 and 402 requires a Credit Grade averageinfour300levelsemestersubjectsinPsychologyinclUding Credit Grades in both Psychology 301 (Methodology) and Psychology 305 (Independent Project).
5. A candidate may select up to four semester subjects (24 credit points) from those offered in courses leading to other degrees of the University withthepennissionoftheDean who shall determine the c1assificationof each semester subject at the 100 or200 level.
6. The results obtained by a successful candidate shall be: in Psychology 403 and 404 - High Distinction, Distinction, Credit, Pass, or Tenninating Pass; in Psychology 401 and 402 - Honours Class I, 11(1), 11(2) or III.
Notes
1 The Bachelor o/Science degree with Honows in Psychology remains tM preferred pathfor those who wish to complete a four-year Psychology degree.
15
SECTION TIlREE
2. Students will not be permitted to transfer from Psychology 4031404 to Psychology4011402, although tire reverse may be possible.
3. Th£ Department of Psychology retains tM right to determine the entry requirements for Psychology 401.
SCHEDULE 4 - BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS
1. To qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Mathematics, a candidate shall pass at least twenty four (24) semester subjects, approved by the Faculty Board. for acredit point score of at least 144 points. Of these, at least 42 points shall come from subjects at the 300 level, at least 42 from subjects at the 200 level, and at least 36 from subjects at the 100 level.
2. At least 96 credit points for the degree must satisfy the following requirements. Up to 48 credit points may come from subjects offered elsewhere in the University, if approved.
3. The subjects counted towards the degree must provide:
(a) 12 credit points from Mathematics 102 and 103;
(b) 18 credit points from Mathematics 201, 203, 204, 206, 208 together with one of Mathematics 205, 207,209,210, 211;
(c) at least 18 further credit points from subjects in the 200 level of Categories A and B;
(d) 24 credit points from subjects at the 300 level of Category A; and
(e) at least 24 further credit points from subjects in Category A and the 300 level of Category B, of which up to 6 credit points may come from subjects at the 200 level Category A. if approved by the Department of Mathematics.
Lev" Category A CategoryB
200 All Mathematics 200 All ComputerScience 200
Statistics 201-204 All Physics 200
300 All Mathematics 300 All ComputerScience300
Statistics 301-304 All Physics 300
SCHEDULE 5 - COMBINED DEGREE COURSES
1. Students qualified to enrol in a combined degree may apply to undertake study in one of the following degree combinations:
Science/Arts SciencejMathematics
Science/Engineering
Mathematics/Arts
Mathematics/Commerce
MathematicslEngineering
Mathematics/ECOnomics
Mathematics/Computer Science
Mathematics/Sutveying
2. Selection of the specific subject content of each combined degree will be prescribed by the Dean or Deans of each Faculty.
16
BACHELOR OF MA TIffiMATICS REGUlATIONS
Regulations Governing the Diploma in Aviation Science in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics, 1. General
These regulations prescribe the conditions and requirements relating to the Diploma in Aviation Science of the University of Newcastle and are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-law 5.2.1.
2. Definitions
In these Regulations and the Ust attached thereto. unless the content or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:
"Board of Studies" means the Board of Studies in Aviation.
"course" means a group of semester subjects selected in conformit y with the conditions prescribed for each degree~
"the Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty;
"Department" means the department or departments offering a particular semester subject and includes any other body so doing;
"Faculty" means the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;
"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty~
"Schedule" means the Schedule to these Regulations relevant to the course in which a person is enrolled or proposing to enrol;
"semester subject" means any programme of study which aggregates to a total of 6 (six) credit points and for which aresult may be recorded. For the purpose of this definition two 3 (three) credit point subjects can be equated to one semester subject.Semester subjects shall be classified as 100 and 200 level by the Faculty Board.
3. Admission
An applicant for admission to candidature shall satisfy the requirements of the Regulations Governing Admission and Enrolment and such other additional requirements as may be . specified in the Schedule.
4. Enrolment
SECfION TIIREE
5. Prerequisites and Corequisites
(1) The Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Head of Department, may prescribe prerequisites andIorcorequisites for any semester subject offered by that Department.
(2) Except with the approval of the Faculty Board, granted afler considering any recommendation made by the Head of the Department, no candidate may enrol in a semester subject unless that candidate has satisfied any prereqUisites and has already or concurrently enrols in or is already enrolled in any semester subject prescribed as its corequisite.
6. Semester Subject
(1) To complete a semester subject. a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars, laboratory classes and field·work and submit such written or other work as the Department shall require.
(2) To pass asemester subject, acandidate shall complete it and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.
(3) The results obtained by a successful candidate in asemester subject shall be: High Distinction, Distinction, Credit, Pass, or Terminating Pass.
7. Standing
(1) The Faculty Board may grant standing in specified and unspecified semester subjects to a candidate. on such conditions as it may detennine after considering the recommendation of the Board of Studies, in recognition of work completed in this university or another approved tertiary institution.
(2) A candidate may not present for the degree subjects which have been counted previously towards a degree or diploma to which the candidate has been admitted or is eligible for admission, except to such extent as the Faculty Board may determine.
8. Withdrawal
(1)
(1) In any semester, a candidate shall enrol only in those, semester subjects approved by the Dean or the Dean's ,. (2)
A candidate may withdraw from asubject or the course only by infonning the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.
A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty. The relevant date shall be:
(2)
(3)
nominee. , t,
Except with the approval of the Dean, given only if the I(
Dean is satisfied that the academic merit of the candidate so f. warrants, a candidate shall not enrol in more than four ~;. semester subjects or their equivalent in anyone semester. ): , A candi~te may not enro~ in an~ s~m:ster in ~y ~ combination of semester subjects which IS Incompatible W
with the requirements of the timetable for that semester. ~ i
(a) in the case of semester subjects offered only in the first semester, the Monday of the 9th week of first semester;
(b )in thecaseof any semester subject offered only in the second semester. the Monday of the 9th week of second semester;
(c) in the case of two semester subjects offered jointly over the duration of two consecutive semesters, the Monday of the 3rd week of the second semester.
DIPLOMA IN A VIA TION SCIENCE REGULATIONS
9. Choice of SUbjects
To qualify for a Diploma in Aviation Science. a candidate shall pass at least fourteen (14) semester subjects, approved by the Faculty Board, for a minimum credit point score of 84 points, in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) 36 credit points from Aviation 101,102,104, 105,106,108;
(b) 24 credit points from Aviation 201, 202, 204, 205;
(c) 12 credit points from either Aviation 103 and 107 or Psychology 101 and 102; or other approved 100 level subjects.
(d) 12 credit points from either Aviation 203 and 206 or Psychology 201 and 202 or 203; or Geography 201 and 203; or other approved 200 level subjects.
10. Time Requirements
(1 ) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, acandidate shall complete the requirements for the diploma within twelve semesters from the commencement of the course. A candidate who has been granted standing in recognition of work completed elsewhere shall be deemed to have commencedthediplomacoursefromadatetobedetennined by the Dean.
(2) Upon request by a candidate, the Faculty Board may grant leave of absence from the course. Such leave shall not be taken into account in calculating the qualifying period for a semester subject or the degree.
11. Award of Diploma
The Diploma shall be awarded in two grades, namely:
(a) Diploma in Aviation Science; and
(b) in cases where a candidate's performance has reached a level determined by the Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Board of Studies, Diploma in Aviation Science with Merit
12. Relaxing Provision
In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the Senate on the Recommendation ofthe Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these RegUlations.
17
SECI'ION FOUR
RECOMMENDED PROGRAMMES FOR THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
DEGREE
The choice of subjects noW offered by the Faculty of Science and Mathematicshas expanded more than two-fold with lheadvent of semesterisation. In order to provide some guidance to students. each Department has provided one or more possible degree patterns which would lead to a suitable professional qualification in theirdiscipline. The patterns are not prescriptive,except in so far as they meet therequiremenls of the various degree regulations. Students may vary their selection in confOInlity with degree regulations, and prerequisite and corequisite requirements as detailed in the semester subject tables. All courses selected must aggregate to 144 credit points for a pass degree or 192 points for a four year Bachelor of Science (psychology) degree.
All semester subjects are identified by a code which includes up to four letters representing the department offering the subject, followed by three numbers. the first of which signifies the level (lOO, 200, 300, 400) at which the subject is being presented.
Thefollowingprogrammeshavebeensetoutasrecommendations
for inclusion in the first, second and third calendar years of a pass degree. Some programmes include a fourth year for the Honours Degree which is generally a postgraduate degree.
Biological Sciences Students wishing to study Biological Sciences are advised to develop capacities in a broad range of the basic sciences, as well as in the Biological Sciences.
Additionally, students' interests can changeduring their University training, and it is advisable to undertake a first-year programme which could lead in many directions, depending upon individual experiences and interests developed during the first year at University. Students intending to major in Biology should consider
18
Programme A. Those wishing to major in Biology and another discipline might elect to complete Programmes B or C.
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES - PROGRAMME A
Year 1
BIOLIOI, BIOLI02, CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 and either; MA THSIOI/l02 or MA THSI 02/103, plus 2 other subjects from ; Level 100. (For Environmental Biology select GEOG101 and
GEOOI02)
Years 2 &3
The table below indicates the Biological Science subjects which should be studied to enable students to develop expertise in particular specialised areas. The indicated subjects are the minimum which should be studied. Additional subjects in Biological Sciences or other disciplines must be taken to satisfy subject requirements for the degree. It should be noted that not all 300 level Biological Science subjects will be offered in the one year. Students wishing to do specific subjects should check when they are scheduled before enrolling in their second year.
Year 4
BIOlAOI and B10lA02
Area of Biology
Animal Physiology
Animal Science
Biochemistry
BlologlcaJ Sciences Subject
BIOL201, 202 204, 205, 301, 302, 305,308
BIOL2Ol, 202, 203, 204, 205, 301, 302,305,308
BIOL201, 202, 204, 205, 301, 302, 305,307,309
SEcnONFOUR
Cell & Molecular Biology BIOL201, 204, 205, 301, 305, 307, 309
Developmental Biology B10L202, 204, 205, 206, 301, 302, 304,307,308
Environmental Biology BIOL202, 203, 206,302, 303, 304, 306
Genetics BIOL201, 203, 204, 205, 301, 305, 306,307,309
Immunology B10L201, 202, 204, 205, 301, 305, 308,309
Molecular Biology BIOL201, 204, 205, 301, 305, 307, 309
Plant Physiology BIOL204, 205, 206, 303, 304, 307
Plant Molecular Biology B10L204, 205, 206, 303, 304,307, 309
ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY -PROGRAMMEB
Year 1
BIOLIOI,BIOLI02,GEOGI01,GEOOI02plus4othersemester subjects.
Year 2
BIOL202, BIOL203, B10L206, GEOG201, GEOG203, GEOO204 plus 2 other semester subjects from Biology, Chemistry, Geography, Mathematics or Geology.
Year 3
BI0L303, BI0L306 plus 2 other Biology and 4 Physical Geography semester subjects
BIOLOGY AND CHEMISTRY - PROGRAMME C
Year 1 BIOLlO1,B10Ll02, CHEMlOl, CHEMI02plus4other semester subjects.
Year 2 BIOL201, BIOL204, BIOL205, CHEM201, CHEM203, CHEM206 plus 2 other semester subjects
Year 3 BIOL301, BI0L305, BIOL307, BIOL309, CHEM301, CHEM306plus2othersemestersubjectsfromBiology,Chemistry or one other discipline.
Chemistry Chemistry is a science concerned primarily with matter and the changes that it undergoes. The study of Chemistry is important not onlyinitselfbut also as a background to many other sciences.
'!be study of Chemistry is open to all students who have qualified for admission into the University. However, those who have not studied sufficient sciences at school are advised to do some selfpreParation before beginning Level 100 Chemistry subjects. Details on expected backgrounds and suggested remedial reading are provided under the appropriate Level 1 00 subjectdescriptions.
The Chemistry Department offers courses over the whole range of the subject. A basic chemical education is available in the
BACHELOR OF SCmNCE PROGRAMMES
traditional areas of analytical, inorganic and physical chemistry together with some more diverse applied subjects.
Theflexible system of subjects offered by the Department allows a student to major in Chemistry on a broad level or to specialise in certain areas of the subject and to combine these with relevant subjects offered by other Departments. Thus a student interested primarily in Physical Chemistry may elect to choose Physics and Mathematics subjects as complements. Conversely, students majoringin other Departments may choose companion Chemistry subjects relevant to their interests. Thus some coursesin Analytical and Inorganic Chemistry would be useful to Geology majors; OrganicChemistry subjectswouldberelevantforBiology majors; Physics majors would benefit from study of some courses in Physical Chemistry, etc.
Students intending to do a major in Chemistry would have to complete programme A which is regarded as a minimum requirement for a thorough grounding in the subject. Students wishing to devote themselves fully to Chemistry will undertake a double major as in Programme B where they can complete up to two-thirds of their degree programme in this one discipline. Many subject combinations in between these two programmes are possible. Thus for example, a student may choose six 3()() Level subjects in Chemistry and two from another Department, etc.
Chemistry is a recognised profession which is served by a professional body, the Royal Australian Chemical Institute (R. A. C.I.). Many employment opportunities for chemists require membership of this organization. Graduates seeking membership must have completed at least the subjects listed in Programme A.
Following either of these programmes or combinations thereof may lead to postgraduate study at the Honours standard (Level 4(0), for which entry requirements are a credit average in at least four Level 300 semester subjects. The Department strongly recommends the Honours Degree to students both for the additional experience it provides and for its enhancement of employment opportunities and professional standing. Honours studentsdevote most of their time to an independent research project together with some fonnal course work. The project is selected in an area of interest from lists provided by members of the academic staff. This degree is also the nonnal entry requirement to research higher degrees (MSc and PhD) offered by the Department.
CHEMISTRY - PROGRAMME A
Year 1
CHEMIOI and CHEMI 02; either MATHlOl/1 02 or MATHI 02/ 103, and four other subjects from Level 100
Year 2
CHEM20l, CHEM202, CHEM203, CHEM204, plus four other subjects from Level 200
Year 3
Choose at least four subjects from CHEM301, CHEM302, CHEM303, CHEM304, CHEM305, CHEM306, CHEM307, CHEM308, and up to four other subjects from Level 300
Year 4
CHEM401 and CHEM402 19
SECfrON FOUR
CHEMISTRY - PROGRAMME B
Year 1
CHEMIOI andCHEMI02; either MA THIOI/1 020r MATHlO2/ 103; and four other subjects from Level 100
Year 2
CHEM20I, CHEM202, CHEM203, CHEM204, CHEM205 and CHEM206, and two other subjects from Level 200
Year 3
CHEM30l, CHEM302, CHEM303, CHEM304, CHEM305, CHEM306, CHEM307, CHEM308
Year 4
CHEM401 and CHEM402
Geography
Geography is the study of the Earth and its people, giving emphasis to the interactions among the physical, economic and social elements of the environment. Modem Geography may be divided into studies in Human Geography (Programme A) and Physical Geography (Programme B), but students may advantageously combine units from Human and Physical Geography (Programme C).
Human Geography (Programme A) analyses the factors and processes that govern the distribution of people and theireconomic and social activities. Changes in distribution patterns and activities through time require study of past processes and prediction for the future from analysis of present trends and patterns. A wide range of opportunity is available for graduates in private business and public service departments especially in areas that involve planning, social and economic analysis. ECONI01, ECONI02, HISTlO!, H1STl02, PHILlO!, SOCIO! and SOCI02 are useful complementary 100 level subjects.
Physical Geography (Programme B) analyses the factors and processes that influence the distributions of phenomena in the physical environment. Emphasis is placed on study ofthe processes that develop landfonns and soils on the meteorological processes that cause variations in climate, and on the factors that influence variations in vegetation communities and animal distributions. Employment opportunities are good both in the private and public sector which is currentI y demanding graduates with a good understanding of environmental issues and their management. B10LlOI, BIOLl02, GEOLlO!, GEOLl02, PHYSIOI and PHYSI02 are useful complementary 100 level subjects.
Geography (Programme C) combines units from Human Geography and Physical Geography at the 200 and 300 levels with other subjects from the Faculties of Arts, Economics, Education and Science and Mathematics. The programme can be taken to Major level without selecting the Methods courses GEOG201, GEOG202, GEOO301 and GEOG302, but for Honours a Methods stream (GEOO201 plus GEOG301 or GEOG202 plus GEOG302) is necessary. Employment opportunities are good but diverse. Suitable complementary subjects at the 100 level should be chosen from Arts, Economics and Science according to second year unit preferences in Geography (see Programmes A and B).
20
BACHELOROFSCrnNCEPROG~ S~E~CT~IO~N~FO~UR~ ____________________________________________ ~B~A~C~HEL~OQR~O~F~S~C~rn~N~C~E~P~R~~~~~~
MAJOR IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY - PROGRAMME A Geology
Year 1
GEOOI01 and GEOGI02. Choose six other subjects from Level 100. ECONIOI, ECONI02, HISTlOI, HISTl02, PHILIOI, SOC! 01 and SOCI 02 recommended
Year 2
GEOG201, GEOG203 and GEOG204. Choose five other subjects from Level 200
Year 3
GE0030I,GEOG303,GEOG304,andGEOG305.Choosefour other subjects from Level 300
Year 4
GE00401 and GEOG402.
MAJOR IN PHysrCALGEOGRAPHY - PROGRAMME B
Year 1
Geology provides the ultimate understanding of our planet, its environment and its evolution. As a natural science, much of the course is outdoors on field excursions and mapping occurs in a diversity of environments. The course is presented as an integrated study of the major processes, hence field,1aboratQry and lecture work are intertwined.
Students are strongly advised to choose companion courses, especially if interests are in palaeontology and evolution (biological sciences), sutficial processes (geography), geophysics (Physics and mathematics), geochemistry, tectonics, mineralogy and petrology (chemistry).
Employment for geologists is available in the minerals, petroleum, coal, environmental and engineering,industries. A professional degree(atleastGEOL305, GE0L306)isrequiredformembership to the professional body. Employers and the Department very strongly recommend the honours degree (GEOL401/GE0L402) which allows professional research through some independent investigation.
GEOO101 and GEOG1 02. Choose six other subjects from Level' lOO.B10LlOI,B10Ll02,GEOLlOI,GEOLl02,PHYSI0Iand, Mathematics
PHYS102 recommended The Department of Mathematics offers semester subjects at all Year 2 levels. For the purposes of the Bachelor of Mathematics degree,
GEOG202, GEOG205 and GEOG206. ChoosefiveothersubjeclS ~ the Bachelor of Science degree, the Bachelor of Arts degree and from Level 200 . the Bachelor of Engineering degree certain combinations are
) advised by the appropriate Faculty. Students wishing to obtain professional qualifications in mathematics should enrol in the BachelorofMathematics degree programme where it is possible to fill their second and third years completely with mathematics.
Year 3
GE00302, GE00306, GEOG307 and GE00308. Choose four; other subjects from Level 300 t , Year 4 i
GE00401 and GEOG402 I MAJOR IN GEOGRAPHY - PROGRAMME C I Year 1 i GEOOI0l and GEOG102. Choose six other subjects from LeVelJ 100 '
Year 2
ChooseTHREEsubjectsfromGEOG201,GEOG202,GEOG203, GE00204, GE00205, GEOG206
Choose five other subjects from Level 200
Year 3*
Choose FOUR subjects from GEOG301, GEOG302, GEOG303, GE00304, GEOG305, GEOG306, GEOG307, GEOG308
Choose four other subjects from Level 300
Year 4
GEOG401 and GEOG402
*NOTE: Prerequisites will restrict some choice according to Level 200 subjects chosen.
Some Faculties use the word "major" to describe a complete strand of study which is considered to be appropriate and sufficiently educative that they may quote the name of the discipline as a component of their degree. The programme suggested for the Bachelor of Science degree would fulfil the requirements for a major in mathematics.
MATHEMATICS_ BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS DEGREE
1be Bachelor of Mathematics degree enables a student to complete afuU course in Mathematics, orto combine a Mathematics major with Computer Science, Statistics, Physics or another appropriate discipline as set out in the Regulations. Note thatfortheBachelor of Mathematics degree, rather more Mathematics is required at the 200 level, thus providing a base for a double major in Mathematics, or a majorin Statistics, with options also for majors in Physics or Computer Science.
Subjects should be chosen according to the requirements of Schedule 4 of the Bachelor DegreeRegulations in this handbook In total, at least 96 credit points must include the subjects in the follOwing list. The remaining 48 points for the ordinary degree may include subjects offered elsewhere in the University.
1be prescribed components of the degree include:
Year 1
MA THl02 and MATHI03 (12 credit points)
Year 2
MATH201,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206,MATH208and one of MATH205, MATH207, MATH209, MATH210 or MATH211 (18 credit points); and a further 18 credit points from MATH200, STA T2OO, COMP200 and/or PHYS200. (For 1990 only MATH205 replaces MATH204 in the above list. Consult with Department)
Year 3
MA TH300 and/or STA 1'300 (24 credit points); plus afurther 24 credit points from MATH300, STA1'300, C0MP300 and/or PHYS300
Year 4
MATH401 and MATH402
MATHEMATICS-BACHELOR OFSCIENCE DEGREE
This is a course of study which consists of at least the follOwing semester subjects.
Year 1 MA THI 02, MA THI03 and 6 other subjects from Level 100
Year 2 MATH20I, MATH203, MATH204, MATH206, MATH208 and one chosen from MATH205, MATH207, MATH209, MATH210, or MATH211 plus 5 five other subjects from Level 200
Year 3 Any four semester subjects from Mathematics I..eveI300, chosen with advice from the Department
Physics
For employment as a physicist, students must have a minimum of an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major in Physics. An honours degree in Physics or combined Physics/Mathematics would be preferred.
Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian Institute of Physics. Membership is limited to graduates with a minimum of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of Physics has a number of grades of membership which are related to experience as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors courses in Physics at tertiary ~nstitutions and judges them in terms of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian Institute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of physicists to matters relating to physicists and their role. There are no formal conditions for registration as a physicist, but a degree is usually necessary for government and indUStry recognition and status as a professional physicist
It is advisable for intending physicists to include ample mathematics in their course and pursue a related science such as Chemistry or Geology to Level 200 subjects if at all possible.
For aPhysics major in the Bachelorof Science degree atleast the follOwing semester subject structure is necessary:
21
SECTION FOUR
Year 1
PHYSI02, PHYSI03', MATIlI02 and MATHI03 Choose four other subjects from Level 100, preferably leading to Level 200 in at least one other science discipline. (*Students achievingacreditlevelorbetterinPHYSIOl andPHYSI02may beadmitted to Level200in Physics with the approval ofthe Head of Department)
Year 2
PHYS201 and at least two subjects chosen from PHYS202, PHYS203 or PHYS204; and MATHZOI (advisory)
Year 3
PHYS301. PHYS302 and two subjects chosen from PHYS303. PHYS304 or PHYS305
Year 4
PHYS401.PHYS402. Note that the Level 300 subjects should be passed with a credit or better for admission to the Bachelor of Science (Honours) degree
Psychology As a discipline, Psychology is open to all students who gain admission to the University. Psychology is abroad discipline and it is difficult to stale preparatory subjects that should be studied together with Psychology.
Recently legislation was passed through the State Parliament which will require anyone wishing to practise as a Psychologist to have a minimum of four years training. In the Science and Mathematics Faculty, Psychology can be taken either as aBScor aBSc(psychology)degree. TheBScdegreeis athree year course which can be followed by a fourth or Honours year and the BSc (psychology) degree is a four year degree. The programmes within these two degrees are set out below.
The Department's aim is to produce "psychologists who should by virtue of their training be able to playa unique role such as critically examining research and scholarly literature in the field of psychology, contributing to empirical research in psychology, administering and interpreting psychological tests and measurement procedures and prescribing, implementing and evaluating forms of psychological intexvention andremediation" .
Entry into the Honours subjects is based on the completion of at least five level 200 subjects in Psychology and a credit leVel average in four 300 level subjects including credit level in Advanced Foundations for Psychology (psYC301) and the Independent Project (psYC302).
The Department currently offers two Applied Masters Degrees. The Master of Psychology (Clinical) degree has an Honours entry requirement while the Master of Psychology (Educational) has a major in Psychology as an entry requirement, a teaching qualification and in addition, two years teaching (or otherrelevant) experience. The Honours degree is the nonnal entry into the research degrees of Master of Science and Doctorof Philosophy.
22
BACHELOROFSCffiNCEPROGRAMMES ~SE~CT~IO~N~FO~UR~ ____________________________________________ ~B~A~CHE~~L~O~R~O~F~S~C~ffi~N~C~E~P~R~OG~RAM~~MES~
BSC WITH A PSYCHOLOGY MAJOR
Year 1
PSYCI01, PSYCI02 plus 6 other semester subjects at level 100
Year 2
PSYC20I, PSYC202, PSYCZ03 plus other subjects at the 200 level, some of which may also be taken in Psychology
Year 3
PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304 plus at least one other chosen from PSYC302, PSYC305, PSYC306, PSYC307 or PSYC308, and four other subjects chosen at the 300 level
BSC HONOURS DEGREE IN PSYCHOLOGY
Year 1
PSYCI 01, PSYCI02, plus 6 other subjects from level 1 00
Year 2 PSYC20l, PSYC202, PSYC203, PSYC204, PSYC205, PSYC206, plus 2 other 200 level subjects
Year 3 PSYC30I, PSYC302, PSYC303, PSYC304 and other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Department
Year 4
PSYC401 and PSYC402. Entry to the Honours degree requires passes in the above six 200 level subjects as well as a credit average at the 300 level, including at least a credit level pass in PSYC301 and PSYC302
BSC(pSYCHOWGY)AWARDEDATHONOURSLEVEL
Years 1 to 2
As for Psychology Honours above
Year 3 PSYC30I, PSYC302, PSYC303, PSYC304 and other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list, including those offered by the Psychology Department
Year 4
PSYC401 and PSYC402
Entry to the Honours degree requires passes in the above six 200 level subjects as well as a credit average at the 300 level, including at least acredit level pass in PSYCH301 and PSYC302
BSC (pSYCHOLOGy) - DEGREE
Years 1 to 2
As for Psychology Honours above
Year 3 PSYC30I, PSYC303, PSYC304 and at least one other 300 level Psychology subject selected from the scheduled list, including those offered by the Psychology Department
Year 4
PSYC403 and PSYC404
Statistics Statistics has been described as the science of turning data into information. This involves collecting, presenting and analysing data, interpreting the results and using them to draw conclusions or make decisions. The principles of Statistics are based on ideas from the philosophy of science and mathematics and, more recently, insights from cognitive science and developments in computing. Computers play an essential role in Statistics for data management and analysis. Statistics is a practical subject. It involves designing experimental plans and sampling procedures, calculating how many subjects or objects should be studied and determining how the measurements should be made in order to obtain data which is reliable, accurate and relevant. Methods of statistical analysis, based on mathematics including probability theory, are used to decide what conclUsions can validly be drawn from the data
The Statistics Department offers subjects from the 100 level through to the Honours level as well as research degrees.
For a major in Statistics a student should take the following subjects:
Year 1
STATIOI and MATHI020r MATHI02andMATHI03. Choose other subjects worth 36 credit points from Levell 00
Year 2
STAT20I, STATZ02, STAT203, and STAT204. Choose other subjects worth 30 credit points from Level 200
Year 3
STATIOI, STATI02, STATI03, STATI04. Choose other subjects worth 24 credit points from Level 300
Year 4
STAT401 andSTAT402
23
SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs FOR BACHELOR DEGREES
LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS REFERRED TO IN BACHELOR DEGREE SCHEDULES 1 TO 4
Number Subject Points When WW
BIOWGICAL SCIENCES
BIOL!OI Plant & Animal Biology
BIOLl02 Cell Biology, Genetics
& Evolution
BIOL20l Biochemistry
BIOL202 Animal Physiology
BIOL203 population Dynamics
BlOL204 Cell & Molecular
Biology
BIOL205 Molecular Genetics
BIOL206 Plant Physiology
BI0L30l Cell Processes
BI0L302 Reproductive Physiology
BI0L303 Environmental Plant
Physiology
BI0L304 Whole Plant
Development
BI0L305 Immunology
BI0L306 Ecology & Evolution
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
BI0L307 Molecular Biology of 6 Plant Development
BI0L308 Mammalian Development 6
BI0L309 Molecular Biology 6
F = Full Year, S1 = Semester 1; S2 = Semester 2
24
SI
S2
SI
SI
SI
S2
S2
S2
SI
SI
SI
SI
S2
S2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
S2 6
S2 6
Not in 6
1990
Prerequisites
1990 1991
Biology I
Biology I
Biology I
Biology I
Biology I
Biology I
Biology ITA
mITB
incl. 712103
Biochemistry
Biology ITA
or lIB
Biology ITA
or lIB Biology ITA
or lIB Biology ITA
or lIB Biology ITA
or lIB
Biology ITA
or lIB
Biology ITA
orITB
Biology lIA
or lIB
BIOL!OI
BIOLl02
BlOLlOI
BlOLl02
B10LlOI
B10Ll02
BIOLIOI
BIOLl02
BIOLIOI
BIOLl02
BlOLlOI
BIOLl02
BlOL201 &
oneBIOLZOO
TwoBIOL200
TwoBIOL200
Two BlOL200
TwoBIOLZOO
BlOL203 &
oneBIOL200
TwoBIOL200
incl. one of
BIOL20lor
BIOL204 or
BIOL205 TwoBIOL200
incl. one of
BIOL20lor
BIOL204
TwoBIOL200
incl. one of
BIOL20lor
BIOL205
Corequisites
1990
SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS FOR BACHELOR DEGREES
Number Subject
CHEMISTRY
CHEM!OI Chemistry!Ol
CHEMI02 Chemistry 102
CHEM20l Analytical Chemistry
CHEM202 Inorganic Chemistry
CHEM203 Organic Chemistry
CHEM204 Physical Chemistry
CHEM205 Applied Chemistry 205
CHEM206 Applied Chemistry 206
CHEM301 Instrument Analysis &
Chromatography
CHEM302 Trace Analysis &
Chemometrics
CHEM303 Coordination & Organo·
metallic Chemistry
CHEM304 Bioinorganic &
Cluster Chemistry
CHEM305 Mechanistic &
Synthetic Organic
Chemistry
CHEM306 Heterocyclic &
Biological Organic
Chemistry
CHEM307 Electrodics & Quantum
Chemistry
CHEM308 Photoelectron
Spectroscopy &
Electrochemical Solar
Energy Conversion
GEOGRAPHY
GBOO101 Introduction to
Physical Geography
GEOO102 Introduction to Human
Geography
GEOG201 Methods in Physical
Gecgraphy
GEOO202 Methods in Human
Geography
GEOO203 Biogeography and
Climatology
GEOO204 Geomorphology of
Australia
GEOO205 Contemporary Australia
& East Asia
Points
6
6
6
6
6
6 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
When
SI
S2
SI
S2
SI
S2
SI
S2
SI
S2
SI
S2
SI
S2
SI
S2
SI
S2
SI
S2
S2
SI
SI
HIW
6
6
6
6
6
6 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Prerequisites
1990 1991
CHEMIOI
Chemistry I
Chemistry I
Chemistry I
Chemistry I
Chemistry I
Chemistry I
Chemistry ITA
Chemistry
ITA and
Maths I or IS
Chemistry ITA
Chemistry ITA
Chemistry IIA
Chemistry lIA
Chemistry ITA
& Maths I or IS
Chemistry ITA
& Maths I or IS
See'
See'
Geography I
Geography I
Geography I
Geography I
Geography
CHEMIOI
CHEMI02
CHEMI02
CHEMI02
CHEMI02
CHEM102
CHEMI02
CHEM201
CHEM201
MATHl02
CHEM202
CHEM202
CHEM203
CHEM203
CHEM204
MATHI02
CHEM204
MATHI02
See'
See'
GEOGIOI
GEOGI02
GEOGIOI
GEOGIOI
GEOGI02
Corequisites
1990
I Students should note that GEOG101 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites/or a major study in Geography. and/or admission to Geography Honours GEOG401.
25
SECfION FOUR
Number Subject Points When H/W
GEOO206 Socio-Economic
Geography
GEOG301 Advanced Methods in Physical Geography
GEOO302 Advanced Methods in Human Geography
GEOG303 Geography of Aboriginal
Australia
GEOO304 The Biosphere &
Conservation
6
6
6
6
6
GEOO305 Climatic Problems 6 GEOG306 Geography of Australia: 6
An Historical Perspective
GEOG301 The Hydrosphere 6 GEOG308 Basic Needs & Pa11erns 6
of Inequality
GEOLOGY GEOLlOl The Environment GEOLl 02 Earth Materials
GEOL201 Mineralogy
GEOL202 Petrology
GEOL203 Palaeoenvironments
GEOL204 Structural & Resource
Geology
GEOL205 Geology Field
Course 205
GEOL206 Geology Field
Course 206
GEOL207 Geology Field
Course 207
GEOLJOI Earth Processes 1
GE01.302 Earth Processes 2
GEOLJ03 Earth Malerials 1
GE01.304 Earth Materials 2
GE01.305 Earth Resources
GEOLJ06 Applied Geology
26
6
6 6
3 6
3
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
12
12
S2
S2
S2
Sl
S2
Sl
Sl
S2
Sl
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Sl,S2 6 S2 6 SI 6
Sl 3
S2 6
S2 3
Sl 3
(+Vac)
Sl 3
(+Vac)
S2 3
(+Vac)
Sl 6
S2 6 Sl 6
S2 6
Sl 12
S2 12
· APPROVED SUBJEcrs FOR BACHELOR DEGREES
Prerequisites
1990 1991
Corequisites
1990
Geography I
Geography IIB
Geography IlA
Geography I
Geography IIB Geography IlA
Geography I
Geography IIA
GEOL101
Geology I
Geology I
Geology! or
GEOLl02
GEOL201
GEOL202
Geology I
Geology I
Geology I &
Geology IIA
GEOLJOI
Geology IIA
Geology IIA
Geology IlA
GeologyIIA
GEOGI02
GEOGIOI
GEOG201
GEOGI02
GEOG202
GEOGI02
GEOG203
GEOG102
GEOGIOI
GEOG206
Advisory
GEOLlOl
GEOLl02
GEOLl02
GEOLl02
GEOG206
Advisory
GEOLIOI
GEOL202
GEOL201
GEOL201 GEOL203
GEOL202
GEOLl02
GEOLl02
GEOLI 02 & GEOL204
GEOL206
Advisory GEOL2OI, 202
GEOL203, 204 &
(I of GEOL205,
GEOL206, 207)
GEOLJOI
GEOL2OI, 202
GEOL203, 204 &
(I of GEOL205,
GEOL206,207)
GEOL2OI, 202
&GEOL203
GEOL2OI, 202
GEOL203,204
GEOL20l,202
GEOL203,204
GEOLJOI
GEOLJ03
GEOLJOI
GEOLJ03
SECfION FOUR
Number Subject
MATHEMATICS
MATHI01 Mathematics 101
MA TH102 Mathematics 102
MATHI03 Mathematics 103
MA THl99 Transition Mathematics3
MA TH20l Multivariable Calculus
MA TH202 Partial Differential Equationsl
MATH203 Ordinary Differential
Equations 1
MATH204 Real Analysis
MATH205 Analysis of Metric
Spaces
MATH206 Complex Analysis 1
MA TH207 Complex Analysis 2
MA TH208 linear Algebra 1
MATH209 Linear Algebra 2
MATH210 Geometry I
MA TH211 Group Theory
MATH212 Discrete Mathematics
MA TH2l3 Mathematical
Modelling
Points When WW
6
6
6
o 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
SI 6
SI,S2 6
S2 6 F 3 SI 2
S2 2
S2 2
Nolin 2
1990
SI 2
SI 2
Not in 2 1990
S2 2 1990
Not 2 in 1990
Not 2
in 1990
SI 2
SI 2
S2 2
APPROVED SUBIEcrs FOR BACHELOR DEGREES
Prerequisites
1990 1991
MATH101
or see2
MATH102
Maths IS'
Malhs I
MATH201
Maths I
Mathsl
Maths I
Maths I
Maths I
Maths I
Maths I
MATH101
or see2
MATHl02
Maths IS' MATH!02&
MATHI03 or
MATH101 &
MATHl02
MATHl02&
MATHI03 or
MATH101 &
MATH102
MATH102 &
MATHl030r
MATH101 &
MATH102
MATHI02
&MATHI03
MATH204
MATH102
MATH103
MATH206
MATH102&
MATH1030r
(MATHI01 &
MATH102&
CompScI)
MATHI02
MATHl03
MATH208
MATH208
MATH102
MATHI03
MATHl02&
MATHI03 or (MATHlOl &
MATHl02&
CompScl)
MATHI02&
MATHl03
Corequisites
1990
MATH203
MATH201
:I AdVisory entry requirement _ HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 1101150 (or must have passed MATH10l)
3 MathemaHcs 102 (pre-1990) is a separate conversion subject which must 1W1 be confused with MATH 102 semester subject
,
SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS FOR BACHELOR DEGREES I SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS FOR BACHELOR DEGREES
Number Subject Points When row Prerequisites
1990
MATH214 Mechanics 3 S2 2 Maths I
MATH215 Operations Research 3 SI 2 Maths I
MATH216 Numerical Analysis 3 S2 2 Maths I
MA TH301 Logic & Set Theory 6 SI 3 MathsIIA
MA TH302 General Tensors & 6 SI 3 Topic CO
Relativity
MATH303 Variational. Methods & 6 SI 3 Topic CO
Integral Equations
MATH304 Ordinary Differential 6 SI 3 Topics CO
Equations 2 &D
MATH305 Partial Differential 6 S2 3 Topic CO
Equations 2
MATH306 Ruid Mechanics 6 S2 3 Topics CO
&B
MATH307 Quantum & Statistical 6 S2 3 Topic CO
Mechanics
MA TH308 Geometry 2 6 Not 3 TopicD
in 1990
MATH309 Combinatorics 6 SI 3 TopicD
MATH310 Functional Analysis 6 SI 3 Topics B,D
CO,K,L
MATH311 Measure Theory & 6 Not 3 TopicL
Integration in 1990
4 Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do not need MATH204
28
I Corequisites I Number Subject
1991 1990 Points When HIW Prerequisites
I Corequisites
MATHI02 MATHW3 1990 1991 1990 I MATH312 Algebra 6 S2 3 Topics D, K
MATHlO3 MATH208&
MATH102& MATHlO3
I (MATH2100r
MATHlO30r (in 1991) MATH21J)
, (MATHIOI & ! MATH313 Numerical Analysis 6 MATHl02&
SI 3 Topics CO,D MATHWI
CompScI) (Theory) MATHW3
MATHl02& MATHI03 MATHW4'
MATHI03 or (in 1991) MATHW8
(MATHIOI & MATH314 Optimization 6 MATHI02&
S2 3 Topics CO, L MATHWI MATH205
CompScJ) MATH2044 or MATH315 Mathematical Biology MATH2100r
6 S2 3 Topics CO, A MATH201
MATHW3 MATH21J
MATH213 MATHWI & MATH316 Industrial Modelling MATHW9
6 S2 3 Topics CO, MATH201 A,F MATHW2
(in 1992) MATH203
MATHWI MATH213
MATH203 MATH216
MATH2044
MATHWI MA TH317 Number Theory MATHW3
6 Not 3 Topic D or MATHlO2 in 1990 K MATHI03
MATH204'
MATHW8 4 Studenls who have passed Mathematics I in. 1989 or before do not need MATH204
MATH20J
MATH202 Not all MATH300 semester subjects will be offered each ear·· . consult the Department of Mathematics. y , some WIll be offered m alternate years either at the 300 or 400 level;
MATH204' The ~~ester timetabling of Mathematics 300 subjects is subject to change. MATHWI MATH207
MATH203 (in 1991) ~T~~8~~:;;-ents will apply to prerequisites in 1991 for students who passed Mathematics I in 1989 and MATH205 and
MATHW4'
MATH206
MATHWI
MATH203
MATH206
MATH210
MATH211
MATH208
MATH201
MATHW5
MATHW4'
MATHW5
MATH206
29
,I,
~' .. ' .. ., '
,
Ii
SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs FOR BACHELOR DEGREES "SE~CTI~O~N~FO~UR~ ______________________________________ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ APPROVED SUBJEcrs FOR BACHELOR DEGREES
Number Subject Points When WW
PHYSICS PHY5IOI Physics 101
PHY5102 Physics 102
PHY5103 Physics 103
6
6
6
PHYS201 Quantum Mechanics & 6
Electromagnetism
PHYS202 Mechanics & Thennal 6
Physics PHYS203 Solid State & Atomic 6
Physics PHYS204 Electronics & 6
Instrumentation
PHYS301 Mathematical Methods & 6 Quantum Mechanics
PHYS302 Electromagnetism & 6 Electronics
PHYS303 Atomic. Molecular & 6 Solid State Physics
PHYS304 Statistical Physics &
Relativity
PHYS305 Nuclear Physics &
Advanced Electro
magnetism
6
6
51 51,52
52
51
51
S2
S2
51
SI
52
52
S2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Prerequisites
1990 1991
5ee' See6 or
PHY5101 PHYSI02 or Physics ill
Physics IN MathsP
Physics IA
Maths I' Physics IA Maths It
Physics IA
arm and Maths lorIS
Physics II Maths II9
Physics n Maths !I9
PHY5301
Physics n Maths II9
PHYS302
See'
See' or PHY5101
PHYSI02
or Physics m
MATH103
PHY5103
MATHl02
PHYSI03
PHYS201
MATHl02
PHYSI02
PHY5201
MATH201
MATH203
PHYS201
MATH201
PHY5203
PHYS301
PHY5202
MATH201
PHYS302
Corequisites
1990
MATH201
Advisory
j Advisory entry requirement _ HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a performance in the lOp 30% of candidature.
6 Advisory entry requirement _ HSC 3 unit Matlwmatics with a mark of at least 110/150 and Physics 2 unit or Science 4 unit with
performance in tlw top 50% of candidature for these subjects.
7 Students achieving a credit level or better in Physics IB may be admitted with approval 0/11u! Head of Department.
, Malhs I may be replaced by Matlwmatics IS plus conversion subject Matlwmatics 102 (pre-1990).
P Mathematics II must have included Topics CO, B and one of Topics D or F.
INSTITUTE OF AVIATION A VIA301 Advanced Aviation
Engineering &
Structures
A VIA302 Advanced Aircraft Operations &
Meteorology
A VIA303 Aviation Engineering &
Supersonic Aerodynamics
A VIA304 Advanced Navigation &
Meteorology
30
6
6
6
6
SI 6 DipAvSc
SI 6 DipAvSc
S2 6 DipAvSc
S2 6 DipAvSc
DipAvSc
incl.A VIA205
DipAvSc
incl. A VIA201
DipAvSc
incl.AVIA204
DipAvSc
and AVIA302
Number Subject Points When WW
PSYCHOLOGY
PSYCI01 Psychology 6 Introduction I
PSYC102 Psychology 6
Introduction 2
PSYC201 Foundations for 6 Psychology
PSYCZ02 Basic Processes 6
PSYC203 Developmental & Social 6 Processes
PSYC204 Individual Processes 6
PSYC205 Applied Topics in 6 Psychology 1
PSYC206 Applied Topics in 6 Psychology 2
PSYC301 Advanced Foundations 6
for Psychology
PSYC302 Independent Project 6
PSYC303 Advanced Basic 6 Processes I
PSYC304 Advanced Basic
Processes 2
PSYC305 Individual Processes
PSYC306 Advanced Social
Processes
PSYC307 Advanced Applied
Topics in Psychology 1
PSYC308 Advanced Applied
Topics in Psychology 2
PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401
PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402
PSYC403 Psychology 403
PSYC404 Psychology 404
6
6
6
6
6
24
24
16
32
SI
S2
SI
SI
SI
S2
52
S2
51
F
SI
S2
S2
51
S2
52
F F
F
F
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
Prerequisites 1990 1991
PSYC101
Psych.!
Psych.!
Psych.!
Psych.I
Psych.!
Psych.!
Psych.IIA
PsychlIA
Psych.ITA
Psych.ITA
Psych.IIA
&IlB
Psych.IIA &IlB
Psyc.IIA
&IlB
Psych,ITA
&Iffi
See Dept"
PSYC401
See Dept. ll
PSYC403
PSYC101
PSYCI02
PSYCI02
PSYC102
PSYCI02
PSYC102
PSYCZOI,202
&PSYC203
PSYCZOI, 202
&PSYC203
PSYCZ01,202
&PSYC203
PSYCZOI
PSYCZOI
PSYCZOI,202,
PSYCZ03,204
&PSYC205
PSYCZOI,202,
PSYCZ03,204,
PSYCZ05 & 206
PSYCZOI,202,
PSYCZ03,204,
PSYCZ05 & 206
PSYCZOI, 202,
PSYCZ03,204,
PSYCZ05 & 206 See DeptH
PSYC401
See Dept.1l
PSYC403
Corequisites 1990
PSYCZ01,203
PSYCZOI, 202
PSYCZ01,202
&PSYC203 PSYCZOI, 202
&PSYC203
PSYC301
PSYC301
PSYC301
PSYC30I,
PSYC303
&PSYC304
PSYC30I,
PSYC303
&PSYC304
PSYC301,
PSYC303
&PSYC304
PSYC30I,
PSYC303
PSYC304
JJ Entry ~o PSYC401 and PSYC402 in the Bachelor o/Science (Psychology) degree requires a Credit or better average in appropnate Part III (pre-1990) or 300 level subjects.
31
SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS FOR BACHELOR DEGREES
LIST OF OTHER APPROVED SUBJECTS Number Subject Points When WW Prerequisites Corequisites
1990 1991 1990
COMPUTER SCIENCE
COMPIOI Computer Science 1 12 F 6 (Enuy quota)
COMP201 Advanced Data Structures· 3 SI 3 COMP101 or 102 MATH212
COMP202 Computer Architecture* 3 S2 3 COMP203
COMP203 Assembly Language· 3 SI 3 COMPIOI or 102
COMP204 Programming Language 3 S2 3 COMP205
semantics*
COMP205 Programming in C· 3 SI 3 COMP101 or 102
COMP206 Theory of Computation'" 3 S2 3 MATH212
COMP241 Cognitive Science 6 F 4
COMP301 Compiler Design** 6 SI 3 COMP20I,203, COMP204, & 206
COMP302 Artificial Intelligence"'''' 6 S2 2 COMP101 or 102
COMP303 Computer Networks·'" 6 SI 2 COMP202
COMP304 Database Design·'" 6 S2 2 COMP201
COMP305 Design and Analysis of 6 COMP206 SI 2
Algorithms·'"
COMP306 Computer Graphics·· 6 S2 2 COMP20I,205,
MA TH208 & 216
COMP307 Software Engineering 6 F 2 COMP201
Principles l~"'*
COMP308 Operating Systems"'· 6 S2 2 COMP20I, 202
.Candidates wlw have completed Computer Science I meet the prerequisites/or COMP200 Level subjects . •• Candidates wlw have completed Computer Science II and Mathematics IICS meet the prerequisites/or all COMP300 Level
subjects. 14 COMP307 requires attendance at lectures in Semester 1 and completion 0/ a Project report in Semester 2.
INFORMATION SCIENCE INF0101 Introduction to
Infonnation Systems
STATISTICS
6
STATI01 Introductory Statistics 6
STA 1'201 Mathematical. Statistics 6
STAT202 Regression Analysis 6
SI
S2
SI
S2
SI S2
SI
5
5
4
4
2 2
2
Maths I MATHI03 or
(STATIO! &
MATHl02)
STAT201 STAT2010r
(STATIO! &
MATHI02)
Maths I orIS MATHl02
STAT201 STAT20lor
(STATIO! &
MATHl02)
Maths I MATHI02
SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS FOR BACHELOR DEGREES
Number Subject Points When WW Prerequisites Corequisites 1990 1991 1990
STATIOI Statistical Inference 6 SI 3 Statistics II STAT201
STAT202
MATH201 STATI02 Study Design 6 SI 3 Statistics n STAT201
STAT202 STATI03 Generalized Linear Models 6 S2 3 Statistical STATIO!
Werence STATI04 Time Series Analysis 6 S2 3 Statistical STATIO I
Werence
LIST OF EXTRANEOUS SUBJECTS MATIJEMATICS EDUCATION EDUC211 Mathematics 6 S2 2 See Subject
Education 211 Description EDUC212 Mathematics 6 Not 2 See Subject
Education 212 in 1990 Description EDUC311 Mathematics 6 Not 2 See Subject
Education 311 in 1990 Description EDUC312 Mathematics 6 Not 2 See Subject
Education 312 in 1990 Description
33
II
SECfIONFOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS FOR THE DWLOMA IN AVUlTION SCmNCE S~E~C~T~I~O~N~F1~VE~ ____________________________________________________________________ __
LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN A VIA TION SCIENCE S b· oct Points When WW Prerequisites
Number U J 1990
AVlAI01 Introductory Aviation 6 SI 6
Science
AVlAI02 Introductory Aviation 6 SI 6
Engineering
AVlA103 Introductory Human 6 SI 6
Factors in Aviation
AVlAI04 Introductory Aviation 6 SI 6
Management AVlAIOI
AVlAIOS Aviation Science 6 S2 6
AVlA106 Aviation Engineering 6 S2 6 AVlA102
AVlAI07 Aviation Psychology & 6 S2 6 AVlAI03
Medicine
AVlAI08 Aviation Management 6 S2 6 AVlAI04
AVlA201 Aviation Meteorology, 6 SI 6 AVlAI05
Navigation & Instruments AVlAI06
AVlA202 Principles of Flight, & 6 SI 6
Jet Aircraft Perfonnance
AVlA203 Human Factors in Aviation 6 SI 6 AVlAI07
AVlA204 Meteorology & High Speed 6 S2 6 AVlA201
High Altitude Navigation
AVlA205 Aerodynamics, Engines & 6 S2 6 AVlA202
Aircraft Systems AVlA203
AVlA206 Aviation Instruction 6 S2 6
34
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Guide to Undergraduate Subject Entries Subject outlines and reading lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference. An explanation is given below of some of the technical tenns used in this Handbook.
l.(a) Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed before a qndidate emols in a particular subject.
(b) Where a subject is marked Advisory it refers to a pass in the Higher School Certificate. In such cases lectures will be given on the assumption that a pass has been achieved at the level indicated. '
(c) Preparatory subjects are those which candidates are strongly advised to have completed before enrolling in the subject for which the preparatory subject is recommended.
2 Corequisites refer to subjects or-topics which the candidate must either pass before enrolling in the particular subject or be taking concurrently.
3. Under examination regUlations "examination" includes mid-year examinations, assignments, tests or any other work by which the final grade of a candidate in a subject is assessed. Some auempt has been made to indicate for each subject how lI;SSessment is detennined. See particularly the general statement in the Department of Mathematics section headed "Progressive Assessment" refening to Mathematics subjects.
4. Texts are books recommended for purchase;
5. References are books relevant to the subject or topic which not be purchased.
. The credit point values associated with each subject are wn to the right of the subject description.
Biological Sciences Subject Descriptions BIOLIOI PLANT & ANIMAL BIOLOGY 6cp
Prerequisites Nil- see notes on BIOUOI under "Advisory Prerequisites for mtry to the Faculty"
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content The course is organised into 2 units
Unitt
Plant Diversity - Fonn and Function
Tlume Plant diversity as a consequence of adaptation for survival in a range of environments.
Topics
The major plant groups and their life cycles. Higher plant structure and function. Growth and differentiation. Control of plant development.
Unit 2
Animal Diversity - Fonn and Function
Theme The variety of structural and functional adaptations which have allowed animals to exploit the wide range of available environments.
Topics
The Animal Phyla - organisatIon of tissues and organs, body plans, body cavities, patterns of development.
Animal Function - digestion, circulation, respiration, integration and control, homeostasis, reproduction and development.
35
SECTION FIVE
Texts
Keeton, W.T. & Gould, J.L. Biological Science 4th edn (Norton, 1986)
or
Curtis, H. Biology 4th edn. (Worth, 1983)
Abercrombie, M., Hickman, C.J. et at Th£ Penguin Dictionary o/Biology (penguin, 1985)
References
Buchsbaum, et a1 Animals WitJUJut Backbones (Univ. Chicago Press, 1987)
BIOLl02 CELL BIOWGY, GENETICS 6cp & EVOLUTION
Prerequisite SeenotesonBIOLl 01 under"Advisory Prerequisites for Entry to the Faculty".
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester. A compulsory 2 day excursion will be held in the mid-year break.
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Cell Biology
Theme The evolution and functional organization of cells.
Topics
Biological molecules - the structure of proteins, carbohydrates and lipidS.
Cell organization - emphasis on organelle ultrastructure and principal function, evolution of cells.
Biological energy processes - photosynthesis, cellular respiration.
Genetics
Cell division, Mendelian genetics, Scientific method. Molecular biology. Gene action, development and differentiation. Probability. Tests of significance. Immunology.
An introduction to ecology, population genetics and evolution.
Texts
Keeton, W.T. & Gould, J.L. Biological Science 4th edn (Norton, 1986)
OR
Curtis, H. Biology 4th edn (Worth, 1983)
Abercrombie, M., Hickman, C.J. et aI. TIu! Penguin Dictionary of Biology (penguin, 1985)
References
Ayala, F.M. & Kiger, J.A. Modern Genetics (Benjamin Cummings, 1984)
Moroney, M.J. Factsfrom Figures (penguin, 1984)
36
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Parker, R.E. fntroductoryStatisticsforBiology{EdwardAmold,1973)
Strickberger, M.W. Genetics 3rd edn (Macmillan/Collier, 1985)
(Students proceeding to BIOL205, Molecular Genetics, are advised to purchase this book).
BIOL201 BIOCHEMISTRY
Prerequisite 1990 Biology I
Prerequisites 1991 BIOL101 and BIOLI02
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
6cp
Carbohydrates,lipids, amino acids and proteins. Vitamins and coenzymes. Enzymes. Intennediary metabolism.
Text
Zubay,G. Bioclu!mistry 2nd edn (MacMillan, 1988)
References
Conn, E.li, Stumpf, P.K. et al OUilines of Bioclu!mistry 5th edn (Wiley 1987)
Lehninger, A.L. Principles of Biochemistry: General Aspects 7th edn (McGraw-Hill,1983)
McGilvery, R.W. Bioclu!mistry. A FunctionalApproach 3rd edn (Saunders, 1983)
BI0L202 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY
Prerequisite 1990 Biology I
Prerequisites 1991 BIOLlO1 and BIOLI02
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Consideration of the processes involved in the transport of oxygen in mammals and emphasizing the relation between structure and function. The course examines molecule, cell and tissue structure and function, particularly of nerve and muscle, the respiratory and cardiovascular systems, comparative energetics and control systems.
References
Eckert, R. & Randall, D.
6cp
Animal Physiology Mechanisms and Adaptations 3rd edn (Freeman & Co., 1983) ,
Bloom, W. & Fawcett, D.W. A Textbook of Histology 10th edn (Saunders, 1975)
Prosser, C.L. ComparativeAnimalPhysiology3rdedn(Saunders, 1973)
Ruch, T.C. & Patton, H.D. Physiology and Biophysics II CirculationRespirationanJ Fluid Baklnce. 20th edn (Saunders, 1974)
SECflONFIVE
Torrey, T.W. & Feduccia, A. Morphogenesis of the Vertebrates 4th edn (John Wiley, 1979)
BIOL203 POPULATION DYNAMICS
Prerequisite 1990 Biology I
Prerequisites 1991 BIOLlOI and BIOL102
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
6cp
Physical and biological factors influencing the abundance and distribution of organisms. Theories of popUlation and control.
Texl
Krebs, C.J. Ecology 3rd edn (Harper & Row, 1985)
References
Pianka, RR EvolUlionary Ecology (Harper & Row, 1978)
Recker, H., Lunney, D. & Dunn, I.(eds) A Natural Legacy (pergamon Press, 1979)
Krebs, CJ. Ecological Methodology (Harper & Row, 1989)
BIOL204 CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 6cp
Prerequisite 1990 Biology I
Prerequisites 1991 BIOLlOl and BIOL102
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Cellular organisation and inter-relationships. Organelles, their structure & function. Cellular processes.
Tex!
Alberts, B., Bray, D. et al Molecular Biology of the CeU2nd edn (Garland, 1989)
BI0L20S MOLECULAR GENETICS
Prerequisite 1990 Biology I
Prerequisites 1991 BIOLl01 andBIOLl02
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
6cp
The structure of chromosomes and chromatin. Genetic mapping and recombination. DNA structure, replication and repair, Gene action and its control. Immunogenetics.
Recombinant DNA technology and genetic engineering
Text
Strickberger, M.w. Genetics 3rd edn (Macmillan/Collier, 1985)
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Old, RW. & Primrose, S.B. Principles of Gene Manipukltion 3rd edn (Blackwell, 1985)
References
Alberts, B., Bray, D., et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell 2nd edn (Garland 1989)
Maniatis, T., Fritsch, E.F. & Sambrook, J. MokcuJarCloning (ColdSpring Harbor Laboratory, 1982). Second edition is anticipated.
BIOL206 PLANT PHYSIOWGY
Prerequisite 1990 Biology I
Prerequisites 1991 BIOLIOl and BIOL102
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
6cp
Fundamental processes peculiar to plant cells are examined. These include cell water relations, membrane transport of solutes, fixation of atmospheric nitrogen, and photosynthesis. Cellular regulation of the processes is emphasized.
Texl
Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. Pklnt Physiology 3rd edn (YVadsworth 1985)
BI0L301 CELL PROCESSES
Prerequisite 1990 Biology lIA or llB including 712103 Biochemistry
Prerequisites 1991 BIOL201 and one further BIOL200
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
6cp
Biochemical and cellular aspects of mammalian hormones will be considered together with their role in homeostasis. The biochemistry of blood and the digestion and absorption of foodstuffs will also be major topics for consideration.
References
Lehninger, A.L. Principles of Bioclu!mistry (Worth, 1982)
Smith, E.L., Hill, R.L., et al PrinciplesofBioclu!mistry.MammalianBioch2mistry.7th edn (McGraw-Hill, 1983)
BIOL302 REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY
Prerequisite 1990 Biology llA or llB
Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Biology of reproduction with particular emphasis on sexual differentiation and gamete physiology.
6cp
37
SECfIONFIVE
References
Johnson, M.H. & Everitt, B.J. EssenJial Reproduction (Blackwell, 1980)
Setchell, B.P. The Mammalian Testis (paul Elel(. 1978)
Torrey, T.W. & Feduccia, A. MorpJwgenesis of the Vertebrates 4thedn (Wiley, 1979)
BIOL303 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
Prerequisite 1990 Biology IIA or lIB
Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
6cp
Environmental impacts on whole plant growth are interpreted in tenns of the responses of susceptible components of key physiological processes. The processes examined include whole-plant water relations, photosynthesis, mineral ion acquisition and nutrient transport.
References
Milthorpe, F.L. & Moorby, J. An introduction to Crop Physiology 2nd edn (Cambridge U.P., 1980)
Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. Plant Physiology 3rd edn (Wadsworth 1985)
BI0L304 WHOLE PLANT DEVELOPMENT
Prerequisite 1990 Biology ITA or lIB
Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
6cp
The development of higher plant structure from meristematic tissue. Developmental control. Structural adaptations ranging from gross morphology to cell ultrastructure to maintain development under environmental stress.
References
Burgess, 1 An Introduction to Plant Cell Development (Cambridge U.P., 1985)
Esau, K. Anatomy of Seed Plants (Wiley, 1960)
BIOL30S IMMUNOLOGY
Prerequisite 1990 Biology ITA or llB
Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
38
6cp
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBIECTDESCRIPTIONS ~SE",CT~IO~N~FIVE= _________________________ C=IIEM~~I",S:2TR"Y,-"S~UBIE~~CT:..'...'D"ES~C"RIPT~"IO"N~S
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Molecular and cellular aspects of the function of the immune system including phylogeny, reproductive and tumour immunology.
Text
Roitt, 1M. Essenliallmmunology 6th edn (Blackwell, 1988)
BIOL306 ECOLOGY & EVOLUTION
Prerequisite 1990 Biology ITA or Biology IIB
Prerequisites 1991 BIOL203 and one other BIOL200
Hours 2 hours per week and two 3 day excursions and two half day excursions
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Structure and dynamics of biological communities. Population genetics and evolutionary ecology. The majority of the practical component of the topic will be undertaken on two excursions.
Text
Krebs, CJ. Ecology 3rd edn (IIaq>er & Row, 1985)
References
Krebs, J.R & Davies, N.B. Behavioural &ology (Blackwell, 1978)
BI0L307 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY OF PLANT 6cp DEVELOPMENT
Prerequisite 1990 Biology IIA or 1m Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL2QO including one ofBIOL201 or BIOL204 or BIOL205
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Regulation of plant growth and development by three interacting genetic systems, hormones and environment. Emphasis on genetic manipulation for plant improvement involving cell culture, somatic hybridisation and genetic engineering.
References
Alberts, B., Bray, D., et al Molecular B;ology of the Cel/2nd edn (Garland, 1989)
Grierson, D. and Covey, S.N. Plant Molecular Biology 2nd edn (Blackie, 1988)
BI0L308 MAMMALIAN DEVELOPMENT
Prerequisite 1990 Biology ITA or IIB
Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200 including one of BIOL201 orBIOL204
HOUTS 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Theme The development ofindependent function.Topics include: Gametes and fertilization, cleavage and preimplantation development, classical developmental models, implantation and the placenta, defects in development, embryo technologies, the neonate and lactation.
References
Alberts, B., Bray, D., et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell (Garland, 1989)
Walbot, V. & Holder, N. Developmenlal Biology (Random House, 1987)
Browder, L.W. Developmenlal Biology 2nd edn (Saunders College, 1984)
Austin, C.R & Short, R. V. Reproduction in Mammals Vols. I & 2, 2nd edn (Cambridge, 1982)
BI0L309 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 6cp Not offered in 1990
Prerequisites 1991 Two BIOL200 including one of BIOL201 orBIOL205
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
COn/enl
To be advised.
Chemistry Subject Descriptions CHEMI0l CHEMISTRY 101 6cp Students who have not studied Chemistry previously are strongly advised to read the first six chapters in the main text (Brown and LeMay) before commencement of the academic year.
Advisory subjects At least Mruhematics (2 unit course), Chemistry (2 unit course), and Physics (2 unit course), with ranking in the top 50% in each case.
Hours 3 lecture hours, 1 hour of tutorial and 2 hours of laboratory classes per week for one semester.
Examination One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 10% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Con/enl
General Chemistry (approximruely 15 lectures)
Revision of basic chemical principles.lntroduction to atomic and molecular concepts. Simple ionic and covalent bonding models.
Organic Chemistry (approximately 24 lectures)
Historical developmenLThe shapes, structures and names of organic compounds; reactions of common functional groups, synthesis, differentiation and structural elucidation of organic compounds. Applications of organic chemistry.
Texts
Aylward, G.H. & Findlay, T.J.V. S1. Chemical Data 2nd edn (Wiley, 1974)
Brown,W.H.
Introduction to Organic Chemistry 4th edn (Wadsworth student edn, 1988)
Brown, T.L and LeMay, H.E. Chemistry. The Central Science 4th edn (Prentice-Hall, 1988)
Lehman, J.W.
Molecular Model Set for Organic Chemistry (Allyn & Bacon, 1984)
CHEMI02 CHEMISTRY 102
PrerequiSite CHEMI01
6cp
Hours 3 lecture hours and 1 hour of tutorial and 2 hours of laboratory classes per week for one semester.
ExamiJuJtion One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 10% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
Inorganic Chemistry (approximately 13 lectures)
Inorganic solids and their structures.Simple molecular orbital theory and bonding in metals. Transition metal chemistry; coordination compounds.
39
ki
SECfION FIVE
Physical Chemistry (approximately 26 lectures)
Chemical equilibria; thermodynamics; electrochemistry; chemical kinetics.
Text
Brown, T.L & LeMay, H.E. Ch£mistry-The Central Science 4th edn (Prentice-Hall, 1988)
CHEM201 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry I
Prerequisite 1991 CHEMI02
6cp
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
ContenJ
Evaluationand manipulation of analytical data; titrimetric methods of analysis including theory of acid-base, complex formation and oxidation - reduction titrations.
Selected instrumental methods of analysis, atomic spectroscopy, absorption spectrophotometry, potentiometric techniques, gas chromatography.
Text
Hargis, LG. Analytical Ch£mistry, PrinciplesandT echniques (PrenticeHalI,1988)
CHEM202 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry I
Prerequisite 1991 CHEMI02
6cp
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
ConJent
Main group chemistry and transition metal chemistry. Coordination complexes and metal ion-ligand interactions; symmetry and structure.
Introductions to reactions and mechanisms, spectroscopic methods, bonding and ligand field theory in coordination compounds, and organometallic chemistry.
Text
Cotton, F.A., Wilkinson, G., Gauss, P.L. Basic Inorganic Chemistry 2nd edn (Wiley, 1987)
CHEM203 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Prerequisile 1990 Chemistry I
Prerequisite 1991 CHEM102
40
6cp
CHEMlliTRYSUBJECTDESCRWTIONS "S=Ecr~I_0_N_AVE~~ __________________________________________________ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work. will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work. is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
ContenJ
A course covering the basic chemistry of aliphatic and aromatic compounds and their spectroscopic properties. Nucleophilic substitutions in aliphatic systems. Preparation of alkenes and alkynes by elimination. Addition reactions of alkenes and alkynes. Carbonyl group reactions. Spectroscopic methods of structure determination, infra-red, proton magnetic resonance, mass spectrometry. Electrophilic substitution in aromatic systems. Reactions of aromatic compounds.
Texts
Solomons, T.W.G. Organic Ch£mistry 4th edn (Wiley, 1988)
OR
Morrison, R.T., Boyd, R.N. Organic Ch£mistry 5th edn (Allyn & Bacon, 19&7) (Recommended for students proceeding to Level3 subjects
Model Kit: Lehman, J.W. Molecular Model Set for Organic Chemistry (Allyn & Bacon, 1984)
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
Each of these SUbjects will consist of three topics drawn from the following list. The offering of certain topics in anyone year will depend on staff availability. For 1990 the subject compositions will be:
CHEM205: Topics 2, 3, and 4. CHEM206: Topics I, 6, and 7. Topics I Industrial metal chemistry 2 Industrial organic chemistry 3 Photochemistry 4 Pollution evaluation 5 Inorganic solids and non-aqueous systems 6 Solid state chemistry 7 Laboratory organic analysis 8 Electrochemical technology 9 Application of spectroscopy
CHEM301 INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSES AND 6cp CHROMATOGRAPHY
Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry ITA
CHEM204 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 6q Prerequisite 1991 CHEM201
Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry I
Prerequisite 1991 CHEMI02
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will co for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory w is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
Chemical Dynamics-rate laws of chemical kinetics; principJ of mechanism determination; transition state theory; electro! activity; thermodynamics of galvanic cells.
Fundamentals of Atomic Spectroscopy - spin-orbit coup . L-S coupling scheme.
FundamentalsofMolecularSpectroscopy-vibration,rotati vibration-rotation of diatomic molecules.
Group Theory - recognition of point groups for an array different molecules; infrared and Raman allowed vibrations.
Text
Atkins, P.W. Physical Chemistry 3rd edn (Oxford, 1982)
CHEM205 CHEM206
APPLIED CHEMISTRY 205 APPLIED CHEMISTRY 206
Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry I
Prerequisite 1991 CHEMI02
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count ~or20% of~: final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work 18 a prereqUISIte for a pass in the subject.
Content
Principles of selected instrumental techniques (e.g. emission spectroscopy and electro-analytical procedures). Automated analysis. Solvent extraction; chromatography (theory and techniques).
Text
Ciuistian, G.D. & O'Reilly, J.E. Instrumental Analysis 2nd edn (Allyn & Bacon, 1986)
CHEMJ02 TRACE ANALYSIS AND CHEMOMETRICS
6cp
Prj!requisites 1990 Chemistry ITA, and Mathematics I or IS.
Prerequisites 1991 CHEM201, MATHI02
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of latMJratory work each week for one semester.
Extunination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count ~or20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work 1& a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
C(lnlent
~ci~les of selected instrumental methods used in trace ana1ysis; lD.clUding flow injection analysis and ion chromatography.
Chemometrics (computer assisted dataacquisition and extraction of chemical infonnation from the raw data).
Text (advisory)
Christian, G.D. & O'Reilly, J.E. Instrumental Analysis 2nd edn (Allyn and Bacon, 1986)
CHEM303 COORDINATION AND 6cp ORGANOMETALLIC CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry ITA
Prerequisite 1991 CHEM202
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count ~or 20% of~: final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work IS a prereqUISIte for a pass in the subject.
Content
A general course exploring the range of modem inorganic chemistry, including synthesis, reactivity and applications of spectroscopic methods.
Metal Chemistry - transition elements and coordination chemistry; isomerism, f-block elements; inorganic reaction mechanisms; electron transfer and voltammetry.
OrganometallicChemistry-maingroupandtransitionrneta1s; structure and bonding; reactions, carbonyl and olefin complexes; applications in industrial catalysis.
Inorganic Spectroscopy - electronic spectroscopy; vibrational ~pectros<:<>py; nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy; mtroducbon to other methods (e.g. Mossbauer, electron spin resonance, and chiroptical spectroscopy).
Text
Purcell, K.F. & Kotz, J.e.
An Introduction to Inorganic Clu!mistry (International Edition) (Holt-Saunders, 1980)
CHEM304 BIOINORGANIC AND CLUSTER CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry IIA
Prerequisite 1991 CHEM202
6cp
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will COUnt for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the su bject.
Content
A course designed to deal at more depth with specialist areas selected from the broad canvas of inorganic chemistry.
Coordination and Bioinorganic Chemistry
Synth~s of comp le~es of multidentate and macrocyclic ligands; metal-directed reacttons and stereoselectivity; metailoproteins and metalloenzymes; bioelectrochemistry and redox proteins.
41
Polymetallic Compounds and Cluster Chemistry
Metal-metal bonding; lower halide clusters. boranes; organo~ transition metal clusters; one-dimensional and super -oonductivity.
Text
No formal text; material to be advised.
CHEM30S MECHANISTIC AND SYNTHETIC 6cp ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite 1990 Chemistry IIA
Prerequisite }991 CHEM203
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
A course emphasising the mechanistic and synthetic aspects of organic reactions. Nucleophilic aromatic substitution. Reactive intermediates, arynes, carbenes and nitrenes. Carbanion chemistry. Reactions of conjugated systems, cycloaddition reactions. Rearrangements and neighbouring group participation. Oxidation and reduction in organic chemistry. Applications of tH and uC nuclear magnetic resonance and mass spectrometry in structural elucidation.
Text As for CHEM203 plus
Williams, D.H., & Fleming, I. Spectroscopic Metlwds in Organic Chemistry 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1988)
Model Kit (as for CHEM203)
CHEM306 HETEROCYCLIC & BIOLOGICAL 6cp ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite }990 Chemistry ITA
Prerequisite 1991 CHEM203
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/Workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
A course covering the occurrence, importance, reactions and synthesis of the heterocyclic and more important groups of biologically active compounds. Reactions and synthesis of simple heterocyclic systems containing one and two heteroatoms. Carbohydrates, amino acids and proteins. Nucleic acids. Antibiotics, anti-cancer agents, insecticides, and plant growth regulators.
Texl
To be advised
42
SUBJECT
CHEM307 ELECTRODICS AND QUANTUM CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite }990 Chemistry IIA, and Mathematics I or IS
Prerequisites }991 CHEM204, MATHI02
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will for 20% of the fmal assessment but a pass in the laboratory is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
Electrodics - the metal solution interface and structure of double layer, rates of charge transfer reactions; determination
introduction to corrosion.
Quantum Chemistry
Texl
To be advised
CHEM308 PHOTOELECTRON SPECTROSCOPY AND ELECTROCHEMICAL SOLAR ENERGY CONVERSION
Prerequisites 1990 Chemistry ITA, Mathematics I or IS
Prerequisites 1991 CHEM204, MATHI02
Hours 2 hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
GENERAL INFORMATION [General information relating to the Schools of Administration & Technology, Education, Health and Visual & Performing Arts(formerly .attached to the Hunter Institute of Higher Education) may be found in Volume 10 of the University Calendar.]
Principal Dates 1990 (See seplU1lte entry fOf Faculty of Medicine)
J,Duary
M()I1day Public Holiday - New Year's Day
5 Friday lAst day for return of Application for Re-Emolment Forms - Continuing Students
B Monday Deferred Examinations begin
Friday Deferred Ruminations end
Friday Public Holiday - Australia Day
Wednesday New students attend in person to enrol and pay charges
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will COl.'''''''' for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory TlU:sday is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject. Ne~ students attend in person to enrol and pay charges
Friday
Content TlU:sday
Photoelectron Spectroscopy - including some Re-emolment Approval Sessions for re-enrolling stUdents lasers. Friday
Tuesday Late emolment session for new students Group Theory - symmetry orbitals, etc. itT
".,ldMsday Late enrolment session for re-enrolling students Atomic Spectroscopy - J -J coupling, Grotian diagrams MOilday First Semester begins
Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion -structure of solids; the semiconductor/solution photoexcitation at the semiconductor/solution electrochemical photo-galvanic cells and e1ectn)ch,emi. photovoltaic cells.
Texl
To be advised
Friday Last day for variation of programme in relation to HECS liability for Semester I.'
Friday Good Friday - Easter Recess commences
Monday Lectures lesume
Last day for withdrawal without academic penalty from first semester subjects (See page (iv) for Dean's discretion)
Wedl!esday Public Holiday - Anzac Day
Priday First Semester ends
MOtiday Examinations begin
MOItd4y Public HOliday - Queen's Birtlxlay
Friday Examinations end
Closing date for applications for selecrion to the Bachelor of Medicine and the Diploma in Aviation Science courses in 1991
be processed by the re1eWll11 3} AlI&wt SeflUster I/)
PRINCIPAL DATES [990
July
2J Monday Second Semester begins
August
6 Monday Last day for withdrawal without academic penalty from full year subjects (See page (iv) for Dean's discretion)
23 Thursday Last day for variation of programme in relation to HECS liability for Semester II.'
September
17 Monday Last day for withdrawal without academic penaky from Second semester SUbjects(See page (iv) for Dean's discretion)
22 Salurday Mid Semester break begins
28 Friday Closing date for applications for enrolment 1990 (Undergraduate COurses other than Medicine and AViation)
Cklober
MOilday Public HOliday - Labor Day
8 Monday Lectures resume
November
2 Friday Second Semester ends
5 MOilday Annual Examinations begin
23 Friday Armual Examinations end
1991 February
25 MO/'Iday First Term beginsa
DATES FOR THE 1990 ACADEMIC YEAR FOR THE BACHELOR OF MEDICINE PROGRAMME
Yearl
Semester I
Semester 2
commences Monday 26 February, 1990 recess Friday 13 April, 1990
to Friday 20 April, 1990
resumes Monday 23 April, 1990 concludes FridaY291une, 1990
commences Monday 161uJy, 1990 recess Monday 24 Sept, 1990
to Friday 5 October, 1990
resumes Monday 8 October, 1990 concludes Friday 26 October, 1990
a daJe yet to be Jitwlised
ADVICE AND INFORMATION
Examinations commence Monday 5 November. 1990
conclude Friday 16 November, 1990
Mini-Elective commences Monday 19 November, 1990
concludes Friday 30 November, 1990
Nan<" SerM~er OIU consisls of Block One (10 weeks) and 7 }Web of Block Two. SeIMsfer Two consists of 'he remaining 3 wuks of Black Two and all of
B/ockThree (10 weeks).
Year Two
Semester One commences Monday 26 February. 1990
"""" Friday 13 April, 1990 to
Friday 20 April. 1990
resumes Monday 23 April. 1990
concludes Friday 29 June, 1990
Semester Two commences Monday 16 July. 1990
"""" Monday 24 Sept, 1990 ID
Friday 5 October, 1990 ",,"m~ Monday 8 October, 1990
concludes Friday 26 October, 1990
Examinatiom commence Monday 5 November. 1990
conclude Friday 16 November, 1990
Mini_Elective commences Monday 19 November, 1990 concludes Friday 30 November, 1990
~=:ter OM consists o/BlockFour (10 weds) and 7wee~ ojBlockFille. Serruster Two cOflSisfs of Ihe remaining 3 weekr of Block FIve and all of Block Six (10 weeks),
Year Tbree
Block 7 Feb 12 _ May4 12 weeks: 11 week term
1 week AVCC/Easter Vacation 13/.4.20/4
Block 8 May 7 June 29 8w_
Vacation July 2 July 13 2 weeks (A Vee common week)
Block 9 July 16 - Sept 14 9 weeks: 8 week term 1 week review 1019-14/9
Stuvac Sept 17 - Sept 21 I w,,"
Assessment Sept24- Oct 12 3w_
Vacation Oct 15 Oct 19 I...".
Elective Oct 22 Dec 14 8w_
Year Four
Clinical Attaclunent 1a Fob 5 Mar 16 6w_
Clinical Attaclunent Ib Mar 19 - May 4 6 week tenn plus 1 week AVCC/Easter Vacation 13/4-2014
Vacation May 7 - May II Iwm
Clinical Attaclunent 2a May 14- June 22 6w_
Clinical Attaclunent 2b Jun625 - Aug 3 6w"""
Vacation Aug 6 - Aug 17 2w"""
Clinical Attaclunent 3a Aug20 - Sept 28 6w"""
Clinical Attachment 3b Oct I Nov 9 6w"""
GP Period Nov 12 - Nov 21 One and a half weeks (inclusive)
Stuvac Nov22 - Nov 30 One and a half weeks
Assessment De'" - D",7 I wuk
Nolt: Ytars 3.4 & 5 do not conform with Ihe University o/Newcastle'sSemi!sler
dates.
ii
Year Five
GP Attachment Fob 5 Feb 16 2w"""
Clinical Attaclunent 1 Feb 19 Mar 23 5w_
Clinical Attaclunent 2 Mar26 - Apr 27 5 w"'" (Eastet 13/4-1714)
Clinical Attaclunent 3 AJX'30 - June 1 5 w"'"
Assessment June 4 - lune8 I wrei<
Vacation June II - lune IS I week
Clinical Attaclunent 4 lune 18- July 20 5w"""
Clinical Attaclunent 5 July23 - Aug 24 5 w"'"
Stuvac Aug27 - Aug3} I week
Assessment Sept 3 - Sept 14 2 w"'"
2nd A.ssessmenl Sept 17 - Sept 21 I wrei<
Elective Sept24- Nov 16 8w"""
Final Assessment Nov 19 - Nov 23 I wool<
Advice and Information Advice and information on matters concerning the Faculties of the University can be obtained from a number of people.
Faculty Secretaries For general enquiries about University regulations, Faculty rules and policies, studies within the University and so on, students may consult
Facully Facully Secretary Phone Architecture Mrs Dianne Rigney' 685634
Art< Ms Chris Wood' 685296
Economics & Mrs Linda Harrigan' 685695
Commerce
Education Mr Peter Day' 685417
Engineering Mr Geoff Gordon ~ 685630
Ms Jill Norburn ' 685630
Medicine Mr Brian Kelleher" 685613
Science & Ms Helen Hotchkiss' 685330
Mathematics
For enquiries regarding particular studies within a faculty or departm Sub-deans, Deans or Departmental Heads (see staff section) should
contacted. Cashier's omce lst Floor McMullin Building.
Hours 10am- 4pm Accommodation Omcer Mrs Kath Dacey, phone 685520 located in the temporary buildings opposite Mathematics.
Careers and Student Employment Omcer
Ms Helen Parker, phone 685466 located in the temporary buildings opposite Mathematics.
Counselling Service phone 685255 located on the courtyard level Library building.
Health Service phone 685763 located in the basement of the Union Building.
Student Loans phone 685601 .. . located in Student Administration. McMullin BUildmg.
, located in room £4.209 inlhe Enginuring Buildings 'loculed in tM Student and Faculty Administration Offi~e. , loculed in room W329 in Ihe Behavioural SciefICes BUlldlflg ~ located in room EA206 in the Engilltering Buildings 'locaud in room £4.204 in. the Engineering Buildings "located in room 6()7A on 1M 6tlljloor. of Ihe. M.edical ScieflCe Building 'located in room V18 inlhe MathelrlQllcs BUllmng
sTUDENTS WITH SPECIAL NEEDS The University of Newcastle has a policy to provide equal opportunity to students with Special Needs.
If you have a disability of any form and feel you need some additional assistance, please do not hesilate to contact one of the following:
Faculty Advisers Architecture
Arts Economics & Commerce Education Engineering Medicine
Science & Mathematics Student Administration Auchmuty Library
Mr Malcolm Park - ext 529 Ass/Prof Don Parkes - ext 659 Mr Bruce Cheek (Sub Dean) - ext 697 Dr Bill Warren - ext 271 Dr David Wood - ext 431 Sr Sue Graff - 266170 Mrs Lyn McBriarty - ext 519 Ass/ProfWarren Brisley - ext 678 Mrs Sandra Box - ext 303 Ms Alicia Hardy - ext 298 Ms Anne Robinson - ext 252
Student Representative Council Mr Steve Watkins - ext 329
ENROLMENT OF NEW STUDENTS
Persons offered enrolment are required to attend in person at the Great Hall early in February toenroland pay charges. Detailed instructions are given in the Offer of Enrolment.
TRANSFER OF COURSE
Students currently enrolled in an undergraduate Bachelordegree course who wish to transfer to a different undergraduate Bachelor degree course (excluding Medicine) must complete an Application for Course Transfer form and lodge it with their Application for Re-enrolmentat the Student Administration Office by 5 January 1990.
If a student's request to transfer to another course is successful, the studentmustcomplete a separate Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) Payment Option fogn for the new course.
RE·ENROLMENT BY CONTINUING STUDENTS
T;here are four steps involved for re-enrolment by continuing students: • collection of the re-enrolment kit • lodging the Application for Re-enrolment fonn with details of
your proposed programme • attendance at the GreatHall for enrolment approval. and • payment of the General Service Charge.
(Students who are in research higher degree programmes re-enrol and pay charges by mail).
Re-Enrolment Kits Re-enroImentkits for 1990 will be available for collection in October. There-enrolmentkit contains the student's Appl ication for Re-enrolment Conn, the 1990 Class Timetable, the Statement of Charges Payable for 1990 and re-enrolment instructions.
LodgIng Application for Re-Enrolment Forms The Application for Re-enrolment fonn must be completed carefully and lodged at the Student Administration Office by 5 January 1990. Students should know their examination results before completing the re-enrolment form. There is no late charge payable if the form is late, but itisvery important that the Application for Re-enrolmentfonn is lodged by 5 January 1990 as late lodgement will mean thatenrolmentapproval 'Will not be possible before the late re-enrolment session.
Enrolment Approval AIl re-enrolling students (except those enrolled in the BMed) are required to attend at the Great Hall on a specific date and time during the period 13-16 February 1990. Enrolment Approval dates are on posters on University Noticeboards and are included in the enrolment kits issued 10 students in December. When auending for Enrolment Approval
ADVICE AND INFORMATION
students will collect their approved 1990 programme and student card. AnyvariationstotheproposedprogrammerequireapprovaJ.Enrolments in tutorial or laboratory sessions will be arranged. Slaff from academic Departments will be available to answer enquiries.
A service charge of $20 will be imposed on students who re-enrol after the specified date.
Payment of Charges The re-enrolment kit issued to re-enrolling students includes a Statement of Charges Payable fonn which must accompany the paymentof charges for 1990. These charges may be paid at any time after receiving the reenrolment kit.
All charges, including debts outstanding to Ihe University, must be paid before or upon re-enrolment - part paymentoftotal amountdue will not be accepted by the cashier.
Payment by mail is encouraged; alternatively by cheque or money order lodged in the internal mail deposit box outside the Cashier's Office in the McMullin Building. The receipt will be mailed to the student.
Payment by cash at the Cashier's Office may lead to queues at enrolment time.
The Cashier's Office will be open for extended hours during the enrolment approval sessions in the period 13-16 February 1990. Afterwards any further payment should be by mail only.
LATE PAYMENT
Payment of the General Services Charge is due before or upon reenrolment. The final date for payment is the date of the Re-enrolment Approval session for the course concerned in the period 13-16February 1990, after which a late charge applies at the rate of:
$10 if payment is received up to and including 7 days after the due date;
$20 if payment is received between 8 and 14 days after the due date; or
$30 if payment is received 15 or more days after the due date.
Thereafter enrolment will be cancelled if charges remain unpaid by 30 March.
STUDENT CARDS
When attending for Enrolment Approval, students will be given their Approved Programme fonn which incorporates the Student Card. The Student Card should be carried by students when at the University as evidence of enrohnent. The Student Card has machine readable lettering for use when rorrowing books from theUniversityLibrary, andconlains' the student's interim password for access to facilities of the Computing Centre.
Students are urged to take good care of their Student Card. If the card is lost or destroyed, there is a service charge of $5 payable before the card will be replaced.
A srudent who withdraws completely from studies should return the Student Card to the Student Administration Office.
RE-ADMISSION AFTER ABSENCE
A person wishing to resume an undergraduate degree course who has been enrolled previously at the University ofNewcastle,bul not ellTolied in1989, is required toapply for admission again through the Universities and Colleges Admissions Centre, Locked Bag 500 Lidcombe 2141.
Application forms may be obtained from the UCAC or from the Student Adminislration Office and close with the UCAC on 29 September each year. There is a $50 fee for late applications.
iii
ADVICE AND INFORMATION
ATTENDANCE STATUS
A candidate for any qualification other than apostgraduate qualification who is enroUed in three quarters or more of a normaJ full-time programme shall be deemed to be a full-time student whereas a candidate enrolled in either a part-time course or less than three-quarters of a fuU-time programme shall be deemed to be a part-time studenL
A candidate for a postgraduate qualification shall enrol as either a fulltime or a part-time student as determined by the Faculty Board.
CHANGE OF ADDRESS
Students are responsible for notifying the Student Administration Office in writing of any change in their address. A Change of Address form should be used and is available from the StudentAdminiSlration Office.
Failure to notify changes could lead to important correspondence or course information not reaching the studenL The University cannot accept responsibility if official communications fail to reach a student who has not notified the Student Administration Office of a change of address.
It should benated that examination results will be available for collection in the Drama Workshop in mid December. Results not collected will be mailed to students. Students who will be away during the long vacation from their regular address should make arrangements to have mail forwarded.
CHANGE OF NAME
StudentswhochangetheirnameshouldadvisetheStudentAdministration Office. A marriage or deed poll certificate should be presented for sighting in order that the change can be noted on University records.
CHANGE OF PROGRAMME
Approval must be sought for any changes to the programme for which a student has enrolled. This includes adding or withdrawing subjects, or changing attendance starus (for example from full-time to part-time)
All proposed changes should be entered on the Variation oj Programme section on the reverse side of your Approved Programme fonn. Reasons for changes and where appropriate documentary evidence in thefonn of medical or other appropriate certificates must be submitted.
WITHDRAWAL
Application to withdraw from a subject should bemadeon the Variation of Programme section on thereversesideofyour Approved Programme fonn and lodged at the Student Administration Office or mailed to lhe Secretary.
Applications received by the appropriate date listed below will be approved for withdrawal without a failure being recorded against the subject or subjects in question.
FuUYear Subjects Monday
6 August 1990
Withdrawal Dates
Fint Semester Subjects Monday
23 April 1990
Secotul Semester Subjects Monday
17 September 1990
WUhdrawaJ after the above dates will normally lead to afailure being recorded against the subject or subjects unless the Dean ollhe F acully grants permission for the student to wUhdraw wilhout afailure being recorded.
IT a student believes that a failure should not be recorded because of the circumstances leading to his or her withdrawal, it is important that full details of these circumstances be provided with the application to withdraw.
iv
CONFIRMATION OF ENROLMENT
Students should ensure that all details on their Approved Programme fonn are correcL Failure tocheck this infonnation could create problems at examination time.
FAILURE TO PAY OVERDUE DEBTS
Any student who is indebted to the University by reason of non-payment of any fee or charge, non·payment of any fine imposed, or who has failed to pay any overdue debts shall not be pennitted to
• complete enrolment in a following year • receive a transcript of academic record; or • graduate or be awarded a Diploma,
until such debts are paid.
Students are requested to pay any debts incurred without delay.
LEAVE OF ABSENCE
A student who does not wish to re-enrol for any period up to three yecm should write to The Secretary and ask for leave of absence. Leave of absence is nonnally granted only to those swdents who are in standing. Applications should be submitted before the end of week of first term in the first year for which leave of absence is Leave of absence will not be granted formore than lhree years and not be granted relrospectively.
Anotice board on the wall opposite the entrance to Lecture Theatre B is used for the specific purpose of displaying examination timNables and other notices about examinations.
STUDENT MA TIERS GENERALLY
'!be main notice board is the display point for notices concerning enrohnentmatters. scholarships, University rules and travel c.oncessions, etc. This notice board is located on the path between the Union and the Library.
Examinations
Tests and assessments may be held in any subject from time to time. In meassessmentof a student's progress in a un iversity course, consideration will be given to laboratory work, tutorials and assignments and to any term or other tests conducted throughout the year. The results of such assessments and class work may be in~ated with those of formal written eltaminations.
EXAMINATION PERIODS
Formal written examinations take place on prescribed dates within the following periods:
Mid Year: 11 to 29 June, 1990
End of Year: 5 to 23 November, 1990
In the case of the B.Med. degree the following applies: Timetablesshowing the time and place at which individual examinations
at the completion of an academic year, a candidate whose P",fo,,",,"o'l will beheld willbepostedontheexaminationsnoticeboardnearLecture is deemed by the Faculty Board to be satisfactory may be Theatre B (opposite the Great Hall).
of absence under such conditions as the Faculty Board Misreading of the timetable will not under any circumstances be Such leave will not normally be granted for more than one year. accepted as au eXCUse for failure to attend an examination.
Application for re-admission to undergraduate degree courses made through the UCAC (see p iii).
A TfENDANCE AT CLASSES
SITTING FOR EXAMINATIONS
Formal examinations, where prescribed, are compulsory. Swdents should consult the final timetable in advance to fmd out the date, time and place
Where a student's attendance or progress has not bee"n~::::,::::~1 oflheir examinations and should allow themselves plenty of time to get action may be taken under the Regulations Governing l to the examination room so that they can take advantage of the 10 Progress. minutes reading time that is allowed before the examination commences.
Theseatallocation list for examinations will be placedon the Noticeboard In the case of illness or absence for some other unavoidable cause,
. subject, and on a noticeboard outside the student may be excused for non attendance at classes.
All applications in writing to the Head of the Departmentoffering the subject. or tenn examinations have been missed, this fact should be noted application.
The granting of an exemption from auendance at classes with it any waiver of the General Services Charge.
GENERAL CONDUCT
In accepting membership of the University, students undertake observe the by-laws and other requirements of the University.
Students are expected to conduct themselves at all times in a
be granted:
any writing instrument, drawing not be taken in: they will
if needed. aid. They must be hand held, battery operated
and students should note that no concession
to a srudent who is prevented from bringing into a room a programmable calculator;
to a student who uses a calculator incorrectly; or
because of battery failure.
fashion. Smoking . FOR FORMAL EXAMINATIONS
or in the University ;:om~:id;d:.:n:. ::.:,:~~~:~::~;;~~~~::: 15 of the Examination Regulations sets down the rules for Members of the academic staff of the University, senior examinations, as follows: officers, and other persons authorised for d'd
Can I ates shall comply with any instructions given by asupervisor report on disorderly or improper conduct occurring in the relating to the conduct of the examination;
NOTICES
Official University notices are displayed on the notice boards students are expected to be acquainted with the contents of announcements which concern them.
before the examination begins candidates shall not read the eJUUnination paper until granted pennission by the supervisor which shall be given ten minutes before the start of the examination;
no candidate shall enter the examination room after thirty minutes from the time the examination has begun;
EXAMINATIONS
(d) no candidate shall leave the eltamination room during the first thirty minutes or the last ten minutes of the examination;
(e) no candidate shall re-enter the examination room after he has left it unless during the full period of his absence he has been under approved supervision;
(f) a candidate shall not bring into the examination room any bag, paper, book, written material, deviceoraid whatsoever, other than such as may be specified for the particular examination;
(g) a candidate shall not by any means obtain or endeavour toobtain improper assistance in his work, give or endeavour to give assistance to any other candidate, or commit any breach of good order;
(h) a candidate shall not take from the examination room any examination answer book, graph paper, drawing paper or other material issued to him for use during the examination;
(i) no candidate may 'moke in the .x ... ination ",om.
Any infringement of these rules constiwtes an offence against discipline.
EXAMINATION RESULTS
End of year examination results will be available for collection from the Drama Studio in December. The dates for collection will be put on noticeboards outside the main examination rooms in November. Results not collected will be mailed. Examination results for Semester I subjects will be mailed out by the Friday before Semester II begins.
No results will be given by telephone.
After the release ofboth Semester I and end of year examination results a student may apply to have a result reviewed. There is a charge pel'
subject, which is refundable in the event of an error being discovered. However, it should be noted that examination 'results are released only after careful assessment of srudents' perfonnances and that, amongst other things, marginal failures are reviewed before results are released.
SPECIAL CONSJDERA TION
All applications for special consideration should be made on the Application for Special Consideration fonn. Relevant evidence should be auached to the application (see Regulation 12(2) of the Examination Regulations, Calendar Volume 1). Also refer to Faculty Policy.
Application forms for Special Consideration are available from the Student Administration Office and the University Hea1th Serv ice. Before a srudent's application for special consideration will be considered OIl
the ground of personal illness it will be necessary for a medical certificate to be furnished in the form set out on the Application.
If a srudentis affected by illness during an examination and wishes to ask for special consideration, he or she must report to the supervisor in charge of the examination and then make wriuen application to the Secretary within three days of the examination (see Regulation 12(3) of the Examination Regulations, Ca1endar Volume 1). Alsorefer 10 Faculty Policy.
Applicants flY special consideration should note that aFaculty Board is not obliged to grant a special examination. The evidence presented should state the reason why the applicant was unable to attend an examination or how preparation for an examination was disrupted. If the evidence is in the form of a medical certificate the Doctor should state the narure of the disability and specify that the applicant was unfit to attend an examination on a particular day or could attend but that the performance of the applicant would be affected by the disability. If the period of disability extends beyond one day the period should be stated.
v
T~~~~~~~ _________________________________________ I' __________________________________________________ C~~~G~~ ~SATISFACTORY PROGRESS -
Unsatisfactory Progress The University has adopted Regulations Governing Unsatisfactory
Progress which are set out below.
Students who become liable for action under the Regulations will be informed accordingly by mail after the release of the End of Year examination results and will be informed oflheprocedure to be followed
if they wish to 'show cause',
Appeals against exclusion must be lodged together with Application for Re-enrohneot forms by Friday 6 January 1989.
The Faculty's progress requirements are set out elsewhere in this volume.
REGULA nONS GOVERNING UNSATISFACTORY
PROGRESS
1.(1)These Regulations are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-law 5.1.2.
0)
(3)
These Regulations shall apply to all students of the University except those who are candidates for a degree of Master or Doctor.
In these Regulations, unless the context or subject matter otherwise
indicates or requires:
"Admissions Committee" means the Admissions Committee of the Senate constituted under By-law 2.3.5;
''Dean'' means the Dean of a Faculty in which a student is
enrolled.
''Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of a Faculty in which a student is enrolled.
2.(1)A student's enrolment in a subject may be terminated by the Head of the Department offering that subject if that student does not maintain a rate of progress considered satisfactory by the Head of Department, Indetermining whether astudentis failing tomaintain satisfactory progress the Head of Department may take into
consideration such factors as:
(2)
(3)
(4)
(a) unsatisfactory attendance at lectures, tutorials, seminars,
laboratory classes or field work;
(b) failure to complete laboratory work;
(c) failure to complete written work or other assignments; and
(d) failure to complete field work.
The enrolment of a student in a subject shall not be terminated pursuant to regulation 2 (1) of these Regulations unless that student has been given prior written notice of the intention to consider the maller with brief particulars of the grounds for so doing and has also been given a reasonable opportunity to make representations either in person or in writing or both.
A student whose enrohnent in a subject is terminated under regulation 2 (1) of these regulations may appeal to the Faculty Board which shall detennine the matler.
A student whose enrolment in a subject is terminated under this Regulation shall be deemed to have failed the subjeCL
3,(1) A Faculty Board may review the academic perfonnance of a student who does not maintain a rate of progress considered satisfactory by the Faculty Board and may determine:
vi
(a) that the student be permitted to continue the course;
(b) that the studentbepermitted tocontinue the course subject to such conditions as the Faculty Board may decide;
(c) that the student be e)(cluded from further enrolment:
(i) in the course; or (ii) in the course and any other course offered in the
Faculty; or (iii) in the Faculty; or
(d) if the Faculty Board considers its powers to deal with the case are inadequate, that thecase be referred to the Admissions Committee together with a recommendation for such action as the Faculty Board considers appropriate.
. a recommendation cr shall arrange for the appeal to be heard by the ! eounciL The Council may confinn the decision of the Admissions
I, eommittee 01' may substitute for it any other decision which the
Admissions Committee is empowered to make pursuant to these ] Regulations,
(2)
8.(1) A student who has been excluded from further enrolment in a Faculty may enrol in a course in anather Faculty Only with the pennission of the Faculty Board of that Faculty and on such cooditions as it may determine after considering any advice from the Dean of the Faculty from which the srudent was e)(cluded. Before a decision is made under regulation 3 (1) (b) (c) or (d) of
these Regulations the srudent shall be given an opporrunity to make representations with respect to the matter either in person or (2)
in writing or both.
A srudent who has been excluded from further enrolment in any course, Faculty or from the University under these Regulations may apply for pennission to enrol therein again provided that in no case shall such re-enrolment commence before the expiration of two academic years from the date of the exclusion. A decision on such application shall be made:
(3) A sludentmay appeal against any decision made under regulatioo. 3 (1) (b) or(c) of these Regulations tothe Admissions Committee
which shall determine the matter.
4, Where the progress ofastudent who is enrolled in a combined course or who has previously been excluded from enrolment in another course or Faculty is considered by the Faculty Board to be unsatisfactory, the Faculty Board shall refer the matter to the Admissions Commitree together with a recommendation for such action as the Faculty Board
considers appropriate.
(a) by the Faculty Board, where the student has been excluded from a single course or a single Faculty, or
(b) by the Admissions Committee, in any other case,
9.(1) A sbJdent whose application to enrol pursuant to Regulation 8 (1) or 8 (2) (a) of these Regulations is rejected by a Faculty Board may appeal to the Admissions Committee.
5.(1) An appeal made by a student to the Admissions Committee (2) pursuant to Regulation 3 (3) of these Regulations shall be in sucla form as may be prescribed by the Admissions Commiuee and shall be made within fourteen (14) days from the date ofpostint
A student whose application toenrol pursuant to Regulation 8 (2) (b) of these Regulations is rejected by theAdmissions Committee may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor,
to the student of the notification of the decision or such further period as the Admissions Committee may accept.
(2) In hearing an appeal the Admissions Committee may take in consideration any circumstances whatsoever including matte not previously raised and may seek such information as it thi . fitconcern ing the academic record orthe appellantand themakl of the detennination by the Faculty Board. Neither the Dean n . the Sub-Dean shall actas a member of the Admissions Commi
(3)
(4)
on the hearing of any such appeal.
The appellant and the Dean or the Dean's nominee shall have right to be heard in person by the Admissions Commiuee.
The Admissions Committee may confirm the decision made by Faculty Board ormay substitute for it any other decision which Faculty Board is empowered tomake pursuant to these Regulatio
6.(1) The Admissions Committee shall consider any case referred to
(2)
(3)
by a Faculty Board and may:
(a) make any decision which the Faculty Board itself coo have made pursuant to regulation 3 (1) (a), (b) or (c) ofth
Regulations; or
(b) exclude the student from enrolment in such other sub'
courses, or Faculties as it thinks fit; or
(c) e)(clude the student from the University.
The Committee shall notmakeany decision pursuant to regulati 6 (1) (b) or (c) of these Regulations unless ithas first given to student the opportunity to be heard in person by the Commi
A student may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor againstanydecis' made by the Admissions Committee under this Regulation. ~
7, Where there is an appeal against any decision of the Admissi. Committee made under Regulation 6 of these Regulations, the VI Chancellor may refer the matter back to the Admissions Comm iuee w
Charges The General Services Charge (details below) is payable by all students. New undergraduate students are required to pay all charges when they attend to enrol.
Re-enrolling students receive in October each year, as part of their reenrolment kit, a statement of charges payable. Students are expected to paycbarges in advance of re.-enrolment and payment by mail is requested. The last date for payment of charges without incurring a late charge is the date of the Re-enrolment Approval session for the particular course (m the period 14-17 February 1989).
1. General Services Charge (a) Students Proceeding to a Degree or Diploma Plus Students joining Newcastle University Union for the first time
$229 Per annum
$35
(b) Non-Degree Students $35 Newcastle University Union Charge Per annum
the exact amount must be paid in full by the prescribed date,
2. Late Charges Where the Statement of Charges payable fonn is lodged With all charges payable after the due date • iheceived up to and including 7 days after the due date; $10 ~ if received between 8 and 14 days after the
~-. -• if received 15 or more days after the due date $30
Other Charges ~ Examination under special supervision
) Review of e)(amination results
"}Statement of matriculation status/or -members of the University
$15 per paper
under review
$8
(d) Replacement of Re-enrolment kit
(e) Re-enrolment after the prescribed re.-enrolment approval session
(f) Replacement of Student Card
4. Indebted Students
$10
$20
$5
All charges, including debts outstanding to the University, must be paid before or upon enrolment - part payment of total amount due will not be accepted by the cashier.
METIIOD OF PAYMENT
Students are requested to pay charges due by mailing their cheque and the Statement of Charges Payable fonn to the University Cashier. The Cashier'S internal mail deposit box outside of the Cashier's Office in the McMullin Building may also be used. Payment should be addressed to the Cashier, University of Newcastle, NSW 2308. Cheques and money orders should be payable to the University of Newcastle. Cash payment must be made at the Cashier's Office 1st Floor McMullin Building between the hours of 10 am 104 pm.
mGHER EDUCATION CONTRIBUTION SCHEME (HECS)
The Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) was introduced in 1989 by the Federal Government to supplement the funding of higher education in Australia. It requires contributions to be made by students towards the cost of their higher education undertaken from the start of 1989.
All students, apart from some exceptions, enrol1ed in instirutions of higher education from 1989 are liable under the HECS. Exemption from payment of the Higher Education Contribution (HEC) applies to:
a fee-paying student in a "fees-approved postgraduate award course"
a student in a "basic nurse education course" a "full-fee-paying overseas sbJdent" a "student who has paid the Overseas Student Charge" a "fully sponsored overseas student" a student in an "enabling course" a student in a "non-award" course a student who has been awarded "a HECS postgraduate scholarship"
The amount each student contributes depends upon the subjects undertaken each semester and is payable whether the subjects are passed or railed. The total liability depends on the proportion of a standard full time load in which the student is enrolled on the semester census dates, ie March 31 in Semester 1 and August 31 in Semester 2. If a srudent withdraws from a subject after one of the above dates, the liabilty for that subject will stand for that semester,
In 1989 the HEC charge for a standard full time programme was SI,800 for the year or S900 fora semester, This amount will be indexed each year in accordance with the conswner price index..
HECS is administered as part of the enrolment process. Students must select one of three sections on the HECS Payment Options fonn.
On enrolment students must do one of the following:
(a) Elect to pay up-front which would require payment of85% of the contriubtion for the semester, with the balance to hepaid by the Commonwealth. Students electing to pay up-front for Semester 2 will be asked to do so at the commencement of Semester 2; or
(b) Defertheir HEC and elect to pay through the taxation system, in which case they must either provide a tax file number or apply for a tax file nwnber as part of their enrolment. Institutions are required toensure thatthe infonnation given by students on their tax file number application is the same as thaton their enrolment form. vii
=C~AMP~~U=S~TRAFA~~C~A~ND~P~ARK~~lN~G~ ____________________________________________ ~ ______ --~-iI ~SE~cr~[O~N~A~VE~ ________________________________________________ SG~EQO~LOGQQY~S~U~Bffi~cr1Jn~ES~CRWT~~[O~N~S
Students electing to defer their HEC and pay through the taxation system are Dot required to make a payment towards their contribution until their taxable income reachesaminimwn threshold level. For the 1989-90 income year the minimum threshold is $23,583. This amount will be increased in line with the consumer price index each year; or
(c) Provide evidence of exemption from the HECS and be enrolled with details of their exempt status being recorded by the institution for subsequent reporting to the Department of Employment, Education and Training.
All enrolling students mustcomplete aPayment Options fonn selecting one of the above three options. Re-enrolling students will automatically maintain their elected payment option. Students must complete a new Payment Options fonn if they change courses or wish to change their payment option.
SCHOLARSIDP HOLDERS AND SPONSORED STUDENTS
Students holding scholarships or receiving other forms of fmancial assistance must lodge with the Cashier their Statement of Charges Payable form together with a warrant or other written evidence that charges will be paid by the sponsor. Sponsors must provide a separate voucher warrant or letter for each student sponsored.
LOANS
Stu4ents who do not have sufficient funds to pay charges should seek a loan from their bank, building society, credit union or other financial institution. Applications for a loan from the Student Loan Fund should bemade to Mr. J. Birch, Student Administration Office. Arrangements should be made well in advance to avoid the risk of a late charge.
REFUND OF CHARGES
A refund of the General Services Charge paid on enrohnent or part thereof will be made when the student notifies the Student and Faculty Administration Office of a complete withdrawal from studies by the following dates.
Notification on or before 30 March 1990 100% refund.
Notification on or before 8 June 1990
After 8 June 1990
50% refund (e",c1uding Union Entrance charge)
No refund.
A refund cheque will be mailed to a student or if applicable a sponsor. Any change of address must be advised.
A refund will not be made before 31 March 1990.
viii
Campus Traffic and Parking' Persons wishing to bring motor vehicles (including motor cycles) on the campus are required to complete a parkinS regiSll'8tion form f« vehicle. Completed forms must be lodged wi~ Ibe Auendant (P Office located off the foyer of the OreatHaiL AU persons must~ with the University's Traffic and ParkingRegulatlons including in approved parking areas, complying wilb road signs and notex 35 k.p.h. on the campus.
If the Manager, Buildings and Grounds. after arr~iDg -Ibe: person period of seven days in which to sulmit a wriuen stiuetDent is sati,n that any person is in breach of Regulations. he may:
(a) warn the person against committing·any lurtber breach; or
(b) impose a fine; or
(c) refer the matter to the Vice-OuutceUor.
The range offines which may be imposed inrespectofvarlouscac.egor· of breach include:·
A student failing to notify the registered number of a vehicle broughton to the campus Parking in areas not set aside for parking. Parking in special designated parking areas ' without a parking pennit for thlll area, Driving offences - including speedins:.d dangerous driving
Failing to stop when signalled to do so by an Attendant (patrol)
Refusing to give information to an Attendant (Patrol)
Failing to obey the directions of an Attendant (patrol)
$[0 $[0
$15
$30
$30
$30
$30
The Traffic and Parking Regulations are stated in (Ull in Ibe Cal Volwne 1.
Geology Subject Descriptions GEOLlOI THE ENVIRONMENT 6cp
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester, including lectures, practicals and field excursions. The course is repeated in both semesters.
Examination One 3 hour paper, assignments arid laboratory practical'
Content
Alecture, field and practical course which examines in the widest context the evolution of our planet and man's environment Specific topics are the Earth in space; evolution and dynamics of the planet Earth; evolution of the atmosphere, hydrosphere, biosphere and man; the impact of climatic change; mineral resources and society.
Tex1s
Consult lecturers concerned
GEOLl02 EARTH MATERIALS 6cp Prerequisite /Corequisite GEOLlOl The Environment
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester, including lectures, practicals and excursions
Exmnination One 3 hour paper, assignments and practical examinations.
Content
A course integrating geological materials and processes within a plate tectonic framework. Magmatism, depositional environments and surficial processes are discussed in terms of modem and ancient environments. Modification by burial, metamorphism and uplift, patterns of life in the past and mineral and energy ~sources are presented.
Tex1S
Clark, J.F. & Cook, B.I. (eds.)
P erspectilles of the Earth (Australian Academy of Science, 1983: Tien Wah Press)
Hall, A. Igneous Petrology (Longmans, 1987)
Whitten, D.G.A.
A Dictionary o/Geology lstedn (Penguin)
GEOL201 MINERALOGY
~rerequisite 1990 Geology I
prerequisite 1991 GEOL102
'Corequisite GEOL202
6cp
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester, including lectures, PIacticals and excursions
Bramination One 3 hour paper and practical examinations. Itontenl
A basic course in crystallography. optical mineralogy and rock. forming minerals.
TexiS
Gribble, C.D. and Hall, A.J.
A Practical Introduction to Optical Min£ralogy (Allen & Unwin, 1985)
GEOL202 PETROWGY
Prerequisite 1990 Geology I
Prerequisite 1991 GEOLl02
Corequisite GEOL201
3cp
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester, including lectures and practicals
Examination One 2 hour paper and practical examinations
An introduction to the petrography and petrology of igneous, metamorphic and sedimentary rocks.
Texts
Hall, A. Igneous Petrology (Longmans 1987)
Gribble, cn. & Hall, A.I. A Practical InJroduction To OpticalMiMralogy (Allen & Unwin, 1985)
Yardley, B.W.D. An Introduction to Metamorphic Petrology (Longmans, 1989)
GEOL203 PALAEOENVIRONMENTS
Prerequisite 1990 Geology I
Prerequisite 1991 GEOL102
6cp
Hours 6 hours perweekforone semester, including lectures and practicals
Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical examinations
Content
A course integrating ancient sedimentaIy environments with the evolution and morphology of ancient life, stratigraphic relationships and time. The course will be supported by field excursions in the local area
Texts
Consult lecturers concerned
GEOL204 STRUCTURAL AND RESOURCE GEOLOGY
Prerequisites 1990 GEOL201, GEOL202
Prerequisites 1991 GEOL201, GEOL202
Corequisite GEOL203
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
3cp
An integrated introduction to geological structures, principles of geological mapping, tectonics and economic resources.
43
SECfION FIVE
Texis
Park, R.G. Foundations of Structural Geology 2nd edn (Blackie. 1988)
McQay,K. The Mapping a/Geological Structures (Open University Press, 1987)
GEOL2OS GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 20S 6cp
Prerequisite 1990 Geology I
Prerequisite 1991 GEOLI02
Hours 7 days field work, assignments and lectures equivalent to 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination By report
Con/en!
AnaIy sis of the southern margin of the Sydney Basin, igneous and metamorphic rocks of the Southern Lachlan Fold Belt and mapping of a composite pluton. Preparation of reports and supporting tutorials.
Texts
McQay.K. The Mapping o/Geological Structures (Open University Press, 1987)
GEOL206 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 206 6cp
Prerequisite 1990 Geology I
Prerequisite 1991 GEOL102
Corequisite (Advisory) GEOL204
Hours 7 days field work, assignments and lectures equivalent to 3 hours per week
Examination By assignment
Content
Mapping of metamorphosed shelf and trench sequences of the Southern Lachlan Fold Belt, integration and presentation in a report.
Text
McOay,K. The Mapping of Geological Structures (Open University Press, 1987)
GEOL207 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 207 6cp
Prerequisite 1990 Geology I
Prerequisite 1991 GEOLl02
Corequisite (Advisory) GEOL204
Hours 7 days field work, assignments and lectures equivalent to 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination By assignment
44
GEOLOGYSUBJECTDESCRWTIONS S,g,Cf~IO~N~FIVE~~ ______________________________________________ ~~~QY~~~~~~~~ - GEOLOGY SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Content
Mapping and data integration in the Cobar Trough; structural and stratigraphic interpretation, relationship of sulphide rocks to structure and stratigraphy; presentation of results andinterpretation in report.
Texts
McOay,K. The Mapping of Geological Structures (Open University Press, 1987)
GEOL301 EARTH PROCESSES 1 6cp
Prerequisite 1990 Geology ITA
Prerequisites 1991 GEOL20l, GEOL202, GEOL203, GEOL204. Either GEOL205 and/or GEOL206 and/or GEOL207
Hours 3 lecture hours and 3 laboratory hours per week for one semester and 4 days fieldwork
Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical examinations
Conlent
Geometrical analysis of multi pI y -deformed terrains; ductile shear zones, kinematic indicators and analysis.
Micropalaeontology and Evolutionary Palaeontology; Micropalaeontology, principles of taxonomy, quantitative methods; species concepts, genetics, evolution; selected evolutionary patterns from the palaeontological record.
Text
Park, R.G. Foundations of Structural Geology 2nd edn (Blackie, 1988)
GEOL303 EARTH MATERIALS 1 6cp Prerequisite 1990 Geology ITA
Prerequisite 1991 GE0L201, GEOL202, GEOL203, GEOL204. Either GEOL205 and/or GEOL206 and/or GEOL207.
Hours 3 lecture hours and 3 laboratory hours per week for one semester and 4 days fieldwork.
Examination One 3 hour paper, class asSignments and practical examination.
Content
Petrology
petrology of igneous rocks in relation to the tectonic environment; petrogenesis of metamorphic rocks; petrogenesis of sedimentary rocks.
Texts
,MacKenzie, W.S., Donaldson, C.H. & Guilford, C. Atlas of Igneous Rocks and their Textures (Longmans, 1982)
Hall, A. Igneous Petrology (Longmans, 1987)
Yardley, B.W.D. An Inlroduction to Metanwrphic Petrology (Longmans, 1989)
GEOL304 EARTH MATERIALS 2
Prerequisite 1990 Geology ITA
Prerequisites 1991 GEOL20I, GEOL202 & GEOL203
6cp
Hours 3 lecture hours and 3 laboratory hours per week for one semester and fieldwork
GEOL302 EARTH PROCESSES 2
Prerequisite GEOL301
ExaminaJion One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical 6cp examination
Hours 3 lecture hours and 3 laboratory hours per week for one semester and 4 days fieldwork. Includes Geophysics given by visiting lectures during tenn and vacation times and practical Geophysics during vacation
Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical examinations
Content
Weathering
Content
Economic Geology
Fundamental criteria forthe formation and characteristics of the principal types of metallic and non-metallic are deposits; mineralogy and resource economics.
Geochronology and World Stratigraphy
Principles of age dating; regional geology of selected provinces of the world.
Texts The mechanisms and geochemistry of weathering withrelation~ Consult lecturers concerned palaeoclimates and their products,laterites, silcretes, ferricrete; ironstone and gossans, together with application of mineralogical techniques to their compositions. J GEOL305 EARTH RESOURCES l2cp Exploration Geophysics Prerequisite 1990 Geology ITA
Geophysical techniques-theirinterpreta1ionandappIication~ Prerequisites 1991 GEOL201, GEOL202, GEOL203, petroleum and mining exploration, and hydrogeological an4 GEOL204 .
engineerlnginvestigations (undertakenasGE0248Xat Macqu COrequisites GEOL301, GEOL302 University)
TexIs Hours 6 lecture hours and 6 laboratory hours per week for one semester and 4 days fieldwork
Consult lecturers concerned Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical examinations
Contenl
Sedimentology
Lithologic associations in relation to the depositional facies of their environment of formation with emphasis on the genetic connection between the geological setting of a depositional area and its sedimentary fill (basin analysis)
Coal Geology
Origin, distribution, classification and economic potential of coal.
Petroleum Geology
Origin, source, migration, entrapment and distribution of petroleum and gas; the exploration and exploitation techniques of its detection, evaluation and recovery.
Stratigraphic Methods
Stratification; stratigraphic breaks; facies changes; factors in Ii thostratigraphy (rockunits,Iithofacies, lithosomes); catastrophic stratigraphy. uniformitarianism and the processes of sedimentation;
stratigraphic nomenclature; biostratigraphic zones; correlation; stratigraphic palaeontology. Types of stratigraphic maps and sections; numerical analysis of data strings; numerical map analysis.
Texts
Consult lecturers concerned
GEOL306 APPLIED GEOLOGY 12cp Prerequisite 1990 Geology IIA
Prerequisites 1991 GEOL201, GEOL202. GEOL203, GEOl204
Corequisites GE0L301, GE0L303
Hours 6 lecture hours and 6 laboratory hours per week for one semester and 4 days fieldwork.
Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical examination.
Content
Economic and Exploration Geology
Source, transport and precipitation of are minerals; sulphide mineralogy, wallrock alteration; ore-fonning fluids; sulphur. oxygen and lead isotopes in ore mineral genesis; fluid inclusions; geochemical environments; dispersion of metals; geochemical exploration.
Crustal Evolution
Geological evolution of selected Archaean and Proterozoic terrains in Australia: comparisons and contrasts with modem tectonic environments to assess the processes of continental growth throughout geological time.
Metamorphic Petrology
Interpretation of textures of rocks formed during prograde metamorphism, ductile shearing and accretion-subduction; processes involved in the production of grain shapes, intergranular and intragranular features.
Texts Consult lecturers concerned
45
SECTIONFIVE
Mathematics Subject Descriptions Level 100 Mathematics Semester Subjects
The usual route for a major study of Mathematics beyond first year starts with MATH102 in first semester, followed by MATH103 in second semester. However, entry at this point requires an adequate level of knowledge and skill. At the time of writing. the minimum level is indicated by a mark of at least 110 out of 150 in 3--unit Mathematics at the New S6uth Wales HSC examination.
Any student with less than this level of knowledge or skill must start with MATHlOl in first semester, followed by MATH102. which is repeated in the second semester. nus combination allows entry to just four of the sixteen Level 200 subjects in Mathematics. Such a student could take MA THI 03 in alateryear to meet the prerequisites for further mathematics subjects.
Note MATIH01 is not appropriate for a student who has performed substantially above the minimum level for entry to MATH102/103.
MATHIOI MATHEMATICS 101 6cp
Prerequisites See advisory prerequisites
Hours 6 hours per week of workshops and tutorials in first semester
Examination One 3 hour paper
Content
Elementary algebra. The Binomial theorem. Elementary calculus. The ideas of convergence (including finding roots). Vector geometry, row reduction of equations. Proof by induction. A brief introduction to complex numbers.
Text University of Newcast Ie Mathematics 101 Worksheet Book (1990)
References
JOMson, R.M. Calculus (Ellis Horwood, 1987)
Ash, C. and Ash, R.B. The Calculus Tutoring Book (IEEE Press, 1987)
Students taking both MATHI 01 and MA THI 02 should also note the text and references for MA TIll 02.
MATHl02 MATHEMATICSI02 6cp
Prerequisite Either a satisfactory performance in 3 unit Mathematics at theNSW Higher School Certificateorequivalent orMATHlO1.
Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week in first semester. The subject is repeated in second semester.
Examination One 3--hour paper.
Content
Calculus of functions of a single variable. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. Taylor's series. Differential equations. An introduction to the calculus of functions of two variables. Matrix algebra. Eigenvalues, eigenvectors. 46
MATIIEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONs ~SE!l!CTdJ'IO,,"N"!.!'FJl'VE(!L ______________________ JMA\lA1HEMA'!!!!!lM1l:TI!I[l;CS~Sl.!U1!B1Elljl:CTTIDl!ES~CRJP!!!!;'ITI!lOl!N§S
Texts University of Newcastle Mathematics 1 Tutorial Not(!J (1990)
Waitelll, R.F.C. & Wehrl1ahn, K. Calculus /2nd edn (Carslaw, 1989)
References
Ayres, F. Calculus (Schaum, 1974)
Examination One 2 hour paper at the end of each semester.
Content
Selected parts of MATH102 and MATH103, covering linear algebra, some abstract algebra. and some elements of real analysis. TIlls is a conversion course available only to students who need W upgrade from Mathematics IS.
MATH201 MULTlVARlABLE CALCULUS :kp Edwards, C.H. & Penney, D.E. Prerequisites Mathematics I or both MATHI 01 and MA THI 02,
Calculus and Analytical Geometry (Prentice-Hall, 1982) or both MATHI02 and MATHI03.
Anton, H. Elemenlary Linear Algebra 5th edn (Wiley, 1987)
Farrand, S. & Poxton, N.J. Calculus (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1984)
Stein, S.K. CalculusandAnalytical Geometry3rd edn (McGraw-1982)
MATHI03 MATHEMATICS 103
Prerequisite MATHI02
Hours 4 lecture hOllIS and 2 tutorial hours per week for seco semester.
Examination One 3 hour paper.
Conlent
Binomial theorem. Complex numbers. Numerical mathemati and computing. Vector geometry and linear algebra: ve spaces,linear maps. Convergence of sequences and series. Alge of limits. An introduction to statistics: exploratory data analys' uncertainty and random variation, probability, use ofMINIT
Texts University of Newcastle Mathematics I Tutorial Not (1990)
Freedman, D., Pisani, R. & Purves, R. Statistics (Norton 1978)
Giles, J.R Real Analysis: An Introductory Course (Lecture notes' Mathematics, University of Newcastle, No.6)
JOMson, RS. & Vinson, T.O. Elemenlary Linear Algebra (Harcourt Brace Jovanovi 1987)
Chapman, C.RJ. Introduction to Mathematical Analysis Keegan Paul, 1973)
Brisley, W. Notes for Linear Algebra (Lecture notes in Mathern University of Newcastle, No.5)
MATHl99 TRANSITION MATHEMATICS
Prerequisite Mathematics IS
Hours 3 hours per week of lectures and tutorials, throughout the year.
HOUTS 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Partial derivatives, Vector operators, Taylor's Theorem. Line integrals,
Multipleand surface integrals, Gauss, Green, Stokes' Theorems.
References
Adams, R.A. Calculus of Several Variables (Addison Wesley, 1987)
Courant,R.
Differential and Integral Calculus Vol.li (Wiley, 1968)
Greenberg, M.D. AdvancedEngineering Mathematics (Prentice Hall,1988)
Grossman, S.I. & Denick, W.R. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Harper and Row, (988)
Kreyszig, E.
AdvancedEngineering Mathematics6th edn (Wiley, 1988; earlier editions are acceptable)
Piskunov, N.
Differential and Integral Calculus VoLl and IT 2nd edn (Mir.1981)
Spiegel, M.R Theory and Problems of Advanced Calculus (Schaum, 1974
MATH202 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 1
:kp
Prerequisites MA TH201 or both MATHI0} and MA THI 02 or both MA THI02 and MA THI 03.
Corequisite MATH203
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper.
COnlent
Orthogonality, Sturm-Liouville systems and generalisations, Series of Orthogonal functions, Fourier Series, Separation of Variables, The classical partial differential equations (heat! diffusion, wave, Laplace, Poisson)
References
Churchill, R.V. & Brown, J.W.
Fourier Series and Boundary Value Problems (McGraw-Hill (978)
Greenberg, M.D. AdvancedEngineeringMathematics(PrenticeHall,1988)
Grossman, S.1. & Derrick, W.R. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Harper and Row, 1988)
Kreyszig, E.
AdvancedEngineeringMathematics6th edn (Wiley, 1988; earlier editions are acceptable)
MATH203 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 1
:kp
Prerequisites MATIl201 orbothMATH101 and MATHI02 or both MATHl02 and MATH\03.
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 3 hour paper.
Conlent
Linear differential equations with constant coefficients, linear differential equations - general case, series solutions _ special functions, Laplace transforms, applications.
References
Boyce, W.E. & Di Prima, RC. Elementary Dijferenlial Equations and BountUuy Value Problems (W'tley, 1986)
Grossman, S.I. & Denick, W.R. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Harper and Row, 1988)
Kreyszig, E.
Advanced Engineering Mathematics 6th edn (paperback, Wiley, 1988; earlier editions are acceptable)
Sanchez, D.A., Allen, RC. & Kyner, W.T.
Differential Equations 2nd edn (Addison Wesley,1988)
MATH204 REAL ANALYSIS
Not offered in 1990
Prerequisites 1991 MATHI02 and MATIII03
Hours 2 hours per week: for one semester
Examination One 2-bour paper.
Content
:kp
Functions, one-ta-one and inverses. Umits of functions, algebra of limits. Continuity, algebra of continuous functions. Properties of continuous functions, intermediate value and compactness properties, uniform continuity. Differentiation, algebra of deriVatives, Rolle and Mean Value Theorem, inverse functions, Taylor's Theorem, de I'HOpital's rule. Integration, the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. Improper integmls.
47
SECfION FIVE
Text
Giles, I.R. Real Analysis: a introductory course (Lecture Notes in Mathematics. University of Newcastle, No.6)
References
Binmore, K.G. MatMmaticalAnalysis (CUP. 1985)
Chapham, C.R.I. IntroductiontoMathematicaIAnalysis(Routledge&Kegan Paul,1973)
Clark, C.w. Elemenlary Mathematical Analysis C'N adsworth-Brooks, 1982)
Spirak, H. Calculus (Benjamin, 1967)
MATH20S ANALYSIS OF METRIC SPACES 3cp
Prerequisite 1990 Mathematics 1
Prerequisite 1991 MATH204
Hours 2 hours per weekfor one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Normed linear spaces. Euclidean spaces, convergence. Finite dimensional normed linearspaces, convergence. Function spaces, convergence. First theorem on uniform convergence. Sequence spaces, convergence. Metric spaces. Completeness in Euclidean, finite dimensional andfunclion spaces. Equivalent norms. Cluster points and closed sets. Relation of "closed"with "complete". Closure. Fixed Point Theorem. Continuity. Sequential compactness, approximation properties.
Texl
Giles, J.R. Introduction to the Analysis of Metric Spaces (CUP, 1989)
References
Bartle, RG. The Elements of Real Analysis (Wiley, 1976)
Giles,l.R Real Analysis: An Introductory Course (Lecture Notes in Mathematics, University of Newcastle, No.6)
Goldberg, R.R. Methods of Real Analysis (Ginn Blaisdell,1964)
Simmons, G.F. Imroduction to T opologyand ModernAnalysis (McGrawHill,1963)
White, A.J. Real Analysis (Addison-Wesley, 1968)
MATH206 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 1 3cp
Prerequisites 1990 Mathematics I or MATHlO2/103; 1991 MATHl02/\03
Corequisite 1990-1991 MATH201
48
MA TI-lEMATICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Complex numbers, Cartesian and polar forms, geometry of the complex plane, solutions of polynomial equations. Complex functions, mapping theory ,limits and continuity. Differentiation, the Cauchy-Riemann Theorem. Elementary functions, exponential,logarithmic, trigonometric and hyperbolic functions. Integration, the Cauchy-Goursat Theorem. Cauchy's integral formulae. Liouville's Theorem and the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra
References
Churchill, RV., Brown, 1.W. & Verhey, R.F. Complex VariablesandApplications(McGraw-Hill,1984)
Grove, B.A. & Ladas, G. Introduction to Complex Variables (Houghton Mifflin, 1974)
Kreysig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wiley, 1979)
Levinson, N. & Redheffer, RM. Complex Variables (Holden-Day, 1970)
O'Neill, P.V. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wadsworth, 1983)
Spiegel, M.R. Theory and Problems of Complex Variables (McGrawHill,1964)
Tall, D.O. Functions of a Complex Variable I and /I (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1970)
MATH207 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 2
Not offered in 1990
Prerequisite 1991 MATH206
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
3cp
Taylorand Laurent series, analytic continuation. Residue theory, evaluation of some real integrals and series, the Argument Principle and Rouche's Theorem. Conformal mapping and applications. Further examination of multivaluedfunctions; branch cuts, Riemann surfaces.
References
Churchill, R.V., Brown, l.W. & Verhey, R.F. ComplexVariablesandApplications(McGraw-Hill,1984)
Grove, B.A. & Ladas, G. Introduction to Complex Variables (Houghton Mifflin; 1974)
Kreysig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wiley, 1979)
Levinson, N. & Redheffer, RM. Complex Variables (Holden~Day, 1970)
SECTION FIVE
O'Neill, P.V. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wadsworth, 1983)
Spiegel, M.R. Theory and Problems of Complex Variables (McGrawHill,1964)
Tall, D.O. Functions ola Complex Variable I and II (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1970)
MATH208 LINEAR ALGEBRA I 3cp
Prerequisites Mathematics I or MA THI 02/1 03 or (MA 1111 01/ 102 plus Computer Science I)
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Vector spaces and subs paces, Linear Maps, Matrix representations. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Diagonalisation, Difference equations. Inner product spaces, Gram-Schmidt process. Orthogonal, unitary, hennitian and normal matrices.
References:
Anton, H. Elementary Linear Algebra 5th edn (Wiley, 1987)
Bloom,D.M. Linear Algebra and Geometry (Cambridge, 1979)
Brisley, W. A Basisfor Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1973)
Johnson, R. & Vinson, T. Elementary Linear Algebra (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1987)
lipschutz, S. Linear Algebra (Schaum, 1974)
Roman,S. An Introduction to Linear Algebra (Saunders, 1985)
Rones, C. & Anton, H. Applications of Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1979)
MATH209 LINEAR ALGEBRA 2
Not offered in 1990
Prerequisites MATH102/l03 andMATH208
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Contem
3cp
Upper triangular matrices, orthogonal diagonalization. Characteristic and minimum polynomials, Cayley-Hamilton theorem. Jordan fonn, rational form. Linearisometries. DUality. Bilinear and quadratic forms.
References
Anton, H. Elementary Linear Algebra 5th cdn (Wiley, 1987)
Bloom,D.M. Linear Algebra and Geometry (Cambridge, 1979)
MA 1HEMA TICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Brisley, W. A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1973)
Lipschutz, S. Linear Algebra (Schaum, 1974)
Nering. E.D. Linear Algebra and Matrix Theory (Wiley, 1964)
MATH210 GEOMETRY 1
Not offered in 1990
Prerequisite MA TH208
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examinations One 2 hour paper.
Content
An introduction to EUclidean and non-Euclidean geometry.
Text and References
To be advised
MATH211 GROUP THEORY
Prerequisite Maths I or MATH102/l03
/Jours 2 hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
3cp
3cp
Groups, subgroups, isomorphism. Permutation groups. groups of lineartransf onnations and matrices, isometries, symmetry groups of regular polygons and polyhedra. Cosets, Lagrange's theorem, normal subgroups, isomorphism theorems, correspondence theorem. Orbits, stabilisers, and theirapplications to theBumsidePotya counting procedure.
Text
Ledermann, W. Introduction to Group Theory (Longman,1976)
References
Baumslag, B. & Chandler, B. Group Theory (Schaum, 1968)
Budden, F.J. The Fascination of Groups (CUP,1972)
Gardiner, C.F. A First Course in Group Theory (Springer, 1980)
Herstein, IN. Topics in Algebra 2nd edn (Wiley, 1975)
Weyl,H. Symmetry (Princeton, 1952)
MATH212 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS
Prerequisites Mathematics 1 or MATH102/103 or (MATH101/l02 plus Computer Science 1)
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
3cp
49
SECTION FIVE
Conlenl
An introduction to various aspects of discrete mathematics of current interest: Graphs, trees, relations, elements of set theory and logic; induction, counting, and recurrence equations; basic combinatorics.
Text
Ross, K.A. & Wright, C.R.B. Discrete Mathematics 2nd edn (Prentice Hall, 1988)
References
Alagar, V.S. Fundmnentals of Computing (Prentice Hall, 1989)
Grimaldi, R.P. Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics (Addison Wesley, 1985)
Kalmanson, K. An Inlroduction to Discrete Mathematics and Us Applications (Addison Wesley. 1986)
Dierker, P,F. & Voxman, W.L. Discrete Mathematics (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1986)
MATH213 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 3cp
Prerequisites Mathematics I or MATHI02/l03
HOUTS 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
This topic is designed to introduce students to the idea of a mathematical model. Several realistic situations will be treated beginning with an analysis of the non-mathematical origin of the problem, the formulation of the mathematical model, solution of the mathematical problem and interpretation of the theoretical results. The use of computers is an integral part of this subject.
References
Andrews, J.G. & McClone, RR. Mathematical Modelling (Butterworth, 1976)
Bender, E.A. Anfntroduction toMathematicalModelling (Wiley, 1978)
Boyce, W.E. (ed.) Case Studies in Mathematical Modelling (Pitman, 1981)
Dym, C.L. & Ivey, E.S. Principles of Mathematical Modelling (Academic, 1980)
Habennan, R. Mathematical Models (Prentice Hall, 1977)
Kemeny, J.G. & Snell, J.L. Mathematical Models in Social Sciences (Blaisdell, 1963)
LighthiU, I. Newer Uses of Mathematics (Penguin, 1980)
Noble,B. Applications of Undergraduate Mathematics in Engineering (M.A.A./Collier-Macmillan, 1967)
Smith,I.M. Mathematical Ideas in Biology (Cambridge, 1971)
50
MArnEMAT1CS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS ~~ECTI"""O",N"FlVE"-""-_____________________ ~MA~J:TIIEMA~~!T1!fCS~S'!JUIIlBJ".!E~CT~D:>IE~Si!:CRIP;!!lI']TI~O:>IN~S
Smith,J.M. Models in Ecology (Cambridge, 1974)
lIfATH216 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 3cp
prerequisites Mathematics I or MA THI02/103 or (MATIlI0l! 102 plus Computer Science I)
MATH214 MECHANICS 3cp Corerequisite MATH103 Prerequisites Mathematics I or MATH 1 02 and MATH103
Corequisite MATH203
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Exmnination One 2 hour paper
Content
Summary of vector algebra Velocity and accelerations. Kinematics of a particle. Newton's Law of Motion. Damped and forced oscillations. Projectiles. Central forces. Inverse square law. The energy equation. Motion of a particle system. Conservation of linear momentum and of angular momentum. Motion with variable mass.
References
Chorlton, F. Textbook of Dynamics (Van Nostrand, 1963)
Goodman, L.E. Dynamics (Blackie, 1963)
Marlon, J.B. Classical Dynamics (Academic, 1970)
Meirovitch, L. Methods of Analytical Dynamics (McGtaw-Hill, 1970)
See also references for MATH201, 202, 203.
MATH21S OPERATIONS RESEARCH 3cp
Prerequisites Mathematics I or MA TIlI02/103 or (MA TIll 01/ 102 plus Computer Science I)
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Contem
Operations research involves the application of quantitative methods and tools to the analysis of problems involving the operation of systems and its aim is to evaluate the consequences of certain decision choices and to improve theeffecti veness ofthe system as a whole.
This subject will cover a number of areas of operations research whichhaveprovedsuccessfulinbusiness,economicsanddefence. These include such topics as network and transportation problems, project management, stock control and replacement theory.
References
Daellenbach, H.G. & George, J.A. Introduction to Operations Research Techniques (Allyn and Bacon, 1978)
Hillier, F.S. & Liebennan, G.J. Introduction to Operations Research 3rd edn (HoldenDay, 1980)
Taha, H.A. Operations Research 4th edn (MacMillan, 1987)
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Sources of enor in computation. Solution of a single nonlinear equatioo.InterpolatiooandtheLagrangeinterpolatingpolynomial. Finite differences and applications to interpolation. Numerical differentiation and integration including the trapezoidal rule, Simpson's rule and Gaussian integration fonnulae. Numerical sOlution of ordinary differential equations - Runge-Kutta and predictor-correctormethods.Numerical solutionoflinearsystems of algebraic equations. Applications of numerical methods to applied mathematics, engineering and the sciences will be made throughout the course.
Text Burden, R.L. & Faires, J.D.
Numerical Analysis 3rd edn (Prindle, Weber & Schmidt, 1985)
eferences
Atkinson, K. E. An fnlroduction to Numerical Analysis (Wiley, 1984)
alfour, A. & Marwick, D.H. Progranuning in Standard Fortran 77 (Heinemann, 1986)
erney, W. & Kincaid, D. NumericaIMathematicsandComputing2ndedn(Brooks_ Cole, 1985)
per, D. & Clancy, M. Oh! Pascal! (Wiley, 1985)
Problem Solving with Structured fortran 77 (Benjamin, 1984 et seq.)
Structured Fortran 77 for Engineers and Scientists (Benjamin,1983)
d, C.F. & Wheatly, P.O. Applied Nwnerical Analysis (Addison-Wesley, 1984)
niversity of Newcastle Computing Centre Handbookfor VAXIVMS
niversity of Newcastle Computing Centre VAX-ll Fortran
LOGIC AND SET THEORY 6cp rerequisite Mathematics IIA. Topics K & L are recommended
not essential, but some maturity in tackling axiomatic systems required.
rerequisite 1991 MATH204 or MATH210 or MATH211
ours 3 hours per week for one semester
ina/ion One 2 hour paper
Contem
Set Theory: Elementary concepts, relations and functions. Partially and totally ordered sets. Similarity and equivalence. Axiom of choice, ZenneIo's postulate, Well-ordering theorem and Zorn's lemma. Cardinality. Cantor's theorem. SchrOderBernstein theorem.
Mathematical Logic: Axiomatic treatment of the propositional calculus. Deduction theorem. Completeness theorem. Quantification theory. Axiomatic treatment of the predicate calculus. First order theories. Models. Logical validity. G&lel's completeness theorem.
References
Crossley, J. et al.
What is Mathematical Logic? (Oxford, 1972)
Halmos, P.R.
Naive Set Theory (Springer 1974; Van Nostrand, 1960)
Hofstadter, D.R
Godel, Escher, Bach: an Eternal Golden Braid (Penguin, 1981)
Kline, M. The Loss of Certainty (Oxford, 1980)
Lipschutz, S.
Set Theory and Related Topics (Schaum, 1964)
Margaris, A. First Order MathemaJical Logic (Blaisdell, 1967)
Mendelson, E. IntroductiontoMathematicaILogic2ndedn(VanNostrand, 1979, papewack)
MATH302 GENERAL TENSORS AND RELATIVITY
Prerequisite Topic CO
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
6cp
Covariant and contravariant vectors, general systems of coordinates. Covariant differentiation, differential operators in general coordinates. Riemannian geometry, metric, curvature, geodesics. Applications of the tensor calculus to the theory of elasticity, dynamics, electromagnetic field theory, and Einstein' s theory of gravitation.
References
Abram,I. Tensor Calculus through Differential Geometry (Butterworths, 1965)
Landau, L.D. & Lifshitz, H.M. The Classical Theory of Fields (pergamon, 1962)
Lichnerowicz, A. Elemems of Tensor Calculus (Methuen, 1962)
Tyldesley, I.R. An Imroduction to Tensor Analysis (Longman, 1975)
51
SECfION FIVE
Willmore, T.J. An InJroduction to DifferenJial Geometry (Oxford, 1972)
MATH303 V ARIA TIONAL METHODS AND 6cp INTEGRAL EQUATIONS
Prerequisite 1990 Topic CO
Prerequisites 1991 MATH 201, MAnI203 and MAnI204
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
ConJenJ
Problems with fixed boundaries; Euler's equation, other governing equations and their solutions; parametric representation. Problems with movable boundaries: transversality condition; natural boundary conditions; discontinuous solutions; cornerconditions. Problems with constraints. Isoperimetric problems. Direct methods. Fredholm's equation; Volterra's equation; existence and uniqueness theorems; method of successive approximations; other methods of solution. Fredholm's equation with degencrate kernels and its solutions.
References
Arthurs. A. M. ComplemenJary Variational PrincipLes (Pergamon, 1964)
Chambers, L.G. lnJegral Equations: A Short Course (International, 1976)
Elsgolc, L.B. CalcuLus of Variations (Pergamon, 1963)
Kanwal, RP. Linear Integral Equations (Academic, 1971)
Weinstock, R. Calculus of Variations (McGraw-Hill, 1952)
MATH304 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2
Prerequisites Topics CO & D
6cp
Prerequisites 1991 MA TH201, MATH203, MATH204 &MATH 208
Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
ConJenl
Linear systems with constant coefficients, general solution and stability. Nonlinear systems, existence of solutions, dependence on initial conditions, properties of solutions. Gronwall's inequality, variation of parameters, and stability from linearisation. Liapunov' s method for stability. Control theory for linear systems - controllability, observability and realisation. Applications will be studied throughout the coursc.
References
Arrowsmith, D.K. & Place, C.M. Ordinary DlfferenJial Equations (Chapman & Hall, 1982)
52
MATIIEMATICS SUBlEcr DESCRIPTIONS S~E~cr""[O",N",-,,Fl,-,VE"'-______________________ lMA~TIIlli!E~,M~A~Trr[CS~S~Ul!:BI1!['!lEcrIT1=D'!lE§<SCgRI!!IP!l'TI!I<:0,!,Nl§.S
Hirsch, M.W. & Smale, S. DifferenJial Equations, Dynamical Systems and Line Algebra (Academic, 1974)
Jordan, D.W. & Smith, P. Nonlinear Ordinary DifferenJialEquations (Oxford, 1977
ConJenJ
Basic concepts: continuum, pressure, viscosity. Derivation of the equations of motion for a real incompressible fluid; Poiseuille and Stokes' boundary layer flow. Dynamical similarity and the Reynolds number. Flow at high Reynolds number; ideal (nonviscous) fluid; simplification of the equations of motion; Bernoulli
MATH30S PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2
6c equations; the case of irrotational flow; Kelvin's circulation
Prerequisite Topic CO
Prequisites 1991 MATH 201, MATH 202 and MATH 204
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
ContenJ
Firstorderequations: linearequations, Cauchy problems; gene solutions; nonlinear equations; Cauchy's method characteristi compatible systems of equations; complete integrals; the metho of Charpit and Jacobi. Higher order equations: linear equatio with constant coefficients; reducible and irreducible equation second order equations with variable coefficients; characteristi hyperbolic, parabolic and elliptic equations. Special method separation of variables; integral transforms; Green's functio Applications in mathematical physics where appropriate.
References
Colton, D. Partial Differential Equations-an I nJroduction (Rando House, 1988)
Courant, R. & Hilbert, D. Methods of Mathematical Physics,Vo1.l1 Parti Di/feremial Equations (Interscience, 1%6)
Epstein, B. Partial DifferenJial Equations - An lntroducti (McGraw-Hill, 1%2)
Haack, W. & Wendland, W. Lectures on Partial and Phaffian Differential Equatio oPergamon, 1972)
Smith,M.G. InJroduction to the Theory ofP artial DifferenJial Equatio (VanNostrand, 1 %7)
Sneddon, LN. ElerMnlsofPartial DifferenJialEquations (McGraw-1957)
MATH306 FLUID MECHANICS
Prerequisites Topics B, CO
Prerequisites 1991 MATH201,MATH203, MATH204 MATH206
Corequisite 1991 MATH207
Ilours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week for semester
Examination One 3 hour paper
theorem. Investigation of simpleirrotational inviscid flows; twodimensional flows; circulation; axisymmetric flow around a sphere; virtual mass. Generation of vorticity at solid boundaries; boundary layers and their growth in flows which are initially irrotational.
References
Batchelor, G.K. An lnJroduction to Fluid Dynamics (Cambridge, 1967)
Chirgwin, B.H. & Plumpton, C. EJemenJary Classical Hydrodynamics (Pergamon, 1967)
Curle, N. & Davies, H.J. Modern FluidDynamicsVols I &II (VanNostrand 1968, 1971)
Goldstein, S. (ed)
Modern DelleloprMnt in Fluid Dynamics Vols I & II (Dover, 1965)
Milne-Thompson, L.M. Theoretical Hydrodynamics (Macmillan, 1968)
Panton, R. Incompressible Flow (Wiley, 1984)
Paterson, A.R. A First Course in Fluid Dynamics (Cambridge, 1983)
Robertson, J.H. Hydrodynamics in Theory andApplication (Prentice Hall, 1%5)
MATH307 QUANTUM AND STATISTICAL 6cp MECHANICS
Prerequisite Topic CO
Prerequisites 1991 MATH201, MATH203 and MATH206
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
ContenJ
Classical Lagrangian and Hamiltonian mechanics, Liouville theorem. Statistical mechanics: basic postulate; microcanonical ensemble; equipartition; classical ideal gas; canonical ensemble; energy fluctuations; grand canonical ensemble; density fiUctuations; quantum statistical mechanics; density matrix, ideal Bose gas; ideal Fermi gas; white dwarf stars; Bose-Einstein condensation; superconductivity.
Quantum mechanics: the wave-particle duality, concept of probability; development, solution and interpretation of Schrodinger's equations in one, two and three dimensions; degeneracy; Heisenberg uncertainty; molecular structure.
References
Croxton, C.A. Inlroductory Eigenphysics (Wiley, 1975)
Fong, P.
Elemenlary QuanlumMechanics (Addison Wesley, 1968)
Huang,K. Statistical Mechanics (Wiley, 1963)
Landau, LD. & Lifshitz, E.M. Statistical Physics oPergamon, 1968)
MATH308 GEOMETRY2
Not offered in 1990 - consult Department
Prerequisite 1990 Topic D
Prerequisite 1991 MATH211
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
ConlenJ
6cp
Euclidean geometry: axiomatic and analytic approach, transformations, isometries, decomposition into plane reflections, inversions, quadratic geometry. Geometry of incidence: the real projective plane, invariance, projective tranSformation, conics, finite projective spaces.
References
Blumenthal, L.M. Studies in Geometry (Freeman, 1970)
Eves, H. A Survey of Geometry (Allyn & Bacon, 1972)
Gamer, L.B. An Outline of Projective Geometry (North Holland, 1981)
Greenberg, M.J. Euclidean and non-Euclidean GeorMtries 2nd edn (r"Ieeman, 1980)
MATH309 COMDINATORICS
Prerequisite 1990 Topic D
Prerequisite 1991 MATH208
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
ConJen!
6cp
Basic counting ideas. Combinatorial identities. Partitions. Recurrence relations. Generating functions. Polya methods and extensions. Equivalence of some "classical numbers". Construction of some designs and codes.
References
Liu, c.L. lnJroduction to Combinatorial Mathematics (McGrawHill, 1984)
Krisbnamurthy, V. Combinatorics: Theory and Applications (Wiley, 1986)
53
SECTION FIVE
Brualdi. R Introductory Combina.toric$ (North Holland, 1977)
Bogart, K.P. Introductory Combinatorics (Pitman, 1983)
Tucker, A. AppiiedCombinatorics (Wiley, 1984)
Street. A.P. & Wallis. W.D. Combinatorics: AFirstCourse(CharlesBabbageResearch Centre. 1982)
MATH310 FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS
Prerequisites 1990 Topics B, CO, D. K. L
Prerequisites 1991 MATH 201 & MATH205
6cp
Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Nonned linear spaces, finite dimensional spaces, inner product spaces. Linear mappings, continuity. topological and isometric isomorphisms. Dual spaces, the Halm-Banach Theorem and reflexivity. Conjugate mappings, operators on Hilbert space, adjoint operators and projection operators.
Texts
Giles, J.R. lnJroduclion to Analysis of Metric Spaces (CUP, 1987)
Giles.J.R. Introduction to Analysis ofNormed Linear Spaces (Univ. of Newcast1e Lecture Notes, 1988)
References
Bachman, G. & Narid, L. Functional Analysis (Academic, 1966)
Banach, S. Theorie des Operations Lineaires 2nd edn (Chelsea. 1988)
Brown, A.L. & Page, A. Elements of Functional Analysis (VanNostrand, 1970)
Jameson, GJ.O. Topology and Normed Spaces (Chapman-Hall,1974)
Kolmogorov, A.N. & Fomio, S. V. Elements of the Theory of Functions and Functional Analysis Vol.! (Grayloch. 1957)
Kreysig, E. lntroductoryFunctionalAnalysiswithApplications(Wiley, 1978)
Liusternik, L.A. & Sobolev, UJ. Elements of Functional Analysis (Frederick Unger,1961)
Simmons, G.F. Introduction to TopologyandModernAnalysis (McGraw-
1Iill.1963)
Taylor. A.E. and Lay. D.C.
54
Introduction to Functional Analysis 2nd edn (Wiley, 1980)
MATIlEMATICS SUBJECi' DESCRIPTIONS ~~Ci'""IO><N,-,-"FIVE,-,-,,-_____________________ ---,MA=TIIEM~,,,,,,A,,T,-,I,,,CS,,-,,S,,U,,BJE,-,,,Ci'"-,D"ES"",C"RIP"",TI"O"N,,,S
Wilansky. A. gaplansley. I. Functional Analysis (Blaisdell, 1964) Fields and Rings (Chicago U.P.,1969)
Young,N. Stewart,l. An introduction to Hilbert Space (CUP, 1988) Galois Theory (Chapman & HaU, 1973)
MATH311 MEASURE THEORY AND INTEGRATION
6cp MATH313 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS (fHEORY). 6cp
Prerequisite 1990 Topic L
Prerequisites 1991 MATH 204, MATH205, & MATlU06
Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week for 0
semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Algebras of sets, Borel sets. Measures, outermeasures, measurab sets, extension of measures, Lebesgue measure. Measurab functions, sequences of measurable functions, simple functio Integration, monotone convergence theorem, the relation betw Riemann and Lebesgue integrals. Lp-spaces, completeness.
References
BartJe. RG. The Elements of Integration (WJley,I966)
de Barra. G. Measure Theory and Integration (Ellis Horwood, 1981)
Halmos, P.R. Measure Theory (VanNostrand,1950)
Kolmogorov, A.N. & Fomin, S.V. Introductory Real Analysis (Prentice Hall, 1970)
MATH312 ALGEBRA
Prerequisites 1990 Topics D and K
Prerequisites 1991 MATlU08 and either MATH210 MATH2I1
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
In this topic the origin and solution of polynomial equations their relationships with classical geometrical problems such duplication of the cube and trisection of angles will be studied. will further examine the relations between the roots coefficients of equations, relations which gave rise to Gal . theory and the theory of extension fields. Why equations degree 5 and higher cannot be solved by radicals, and what implications of this fact are for algebra and numerical analy . will be investigated.
References
Birkhoff. G.D. & MacLane, S. A Survey of Modern Algebra (Macmillan, 1953)
Edwards, H.M. Galois Theory (Springer. 1984)
Herstein, I.N. Topics in Algebra (Wiley, 1975)
Prerequisites 1990 Topics CO and D
Prerequisites 199] MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and MA TH208. Programming ability (high-level language) is assumed.
Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Solution of linear systems of algebraic equations by direct and linear iterative methods; particular attention will be given to the influence of various types of errors on the numerical result, to the general theory of convergence of the latter class of methods and to the concept of "condition" of a system. Solution by both one step and multistep methods of initial value problems involving ordinary differential equations. Investigation of stability oflioear marching schemes. Boundary value problems. Finite-difference and finite-element methods of solution of partial differential equations. If time permits, other numerical analysis problems such as integration, solution of non-linear equations etc will be treated.
Text
Burden, R.L. & Faires, J.D. Numerical Analysis 4th edn (Prindle,Weber & Schmidt.1989)
References
Atkinson, K.E. An Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Wiley, 1978)
Ames, W.P. Numerical Methods for Partial Differential Equations (Nelson. 1969)
Cohen, A.M. et al. Nunurical Analysis (McGraw-Hill, 1973)
Conte, S.D. & de Boor, C. Elementary Numerical Analysis 3rd edn (McGraw-Hill, 1980)
Forsythe, G.E., Malcolm, M.A. & Moler, C.B. Computer Methods for Mathematical Computations (PrenticeHall.1977)
Isaacson, E. & Keller, H.M. Analysis of Numerical Methods (Wiley,1966)
Lambert. J.D. & Wait. R. C omputalionalM etlwds inOrdinary DijferentialEquations (Wiley. 1973)
Mitchell. A.R. & Wait. R. The Finite Element Method in Partial Differential Equations (Wiley, 1977)
Pizer. S.M. & Wallace. V.L. To CompUleNumerically: ConceptsandSlrategies(ljttle, Brown. 1983)
Smith,G.D. Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations: Finite Difference Methods (Oxford, 1978)
MATH314 OPTIMIZATION
Prerequisites 1990 Topics CO, L
Prerequisites 1991 MATH201, MATII205
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
6cp
Many situations in Economics, Engineering, Experimental and Pure Science are reducible to questions of Optimization. The course is introduced by considering some simple examples of this. The basic analysis and theory of convex sets and convex functions underlying optimization arethendeveloped. The theory of linear programming, including Bland's anticyc1ing rule and duality, is examined. Constrained nonlinear optimization in both the convex and the smooth case are developed from a common separation argument Ekeland's variational principle, descent methods and the one dimensional Fibonacci search for unconstrained problems form the final section of the course.
References
Cameron,N. Introduction to Linear and Convex Programming (Cambridge U.P .• 1985)
Greig,D.M. Optimization (Longman, 1980)
Hestenes, M.R. OptimizationTheory: TheFiniteDimensionalCase (Wiley, 1975)
Holmes, RB. A Course on Optimization and Best Approximation (Springer. 1972)
Luenberger, D.G. Optimization by Vector Space Methods (Wiley, 1969)
Luenberger, D.G. Introduction to Linear and Nonlinear Programming (Addison-Wesley. 1973)
Ponstein, I. Approaches to the Theory of Optimization (Cambridge U.P .• 1980)
Roberts. R. W. & Vanberg. D.E. Convex Functions (Academic Press, 1973)
Werner, I. Optimization Theory and Applications (Vieweg, 1984)
55
SECfION FIVE
MATH315 MATHEMATICAL BIOLOGY 6cp
Prerequisites 1990 Topics A, CO
Prerequisites 1991 MATH201, MATH203,MATH 213
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
This subject will show theuseof mathematical models toadvance the understanding of certain biological phenomena A number of biological situations will be investigated and students will be expected to use both analytical and computational techniques to obtain results which can be com pared with experimental findings.
References
Edelstein-Keshet, L. Mathl!matical Models in Biology (Random House, 1987)
Jones, D.S. & Sleeman, B.D. Differential Equations and Mathl!matical Biology (Allen & Unwin, 1983)
Murray, J.D. Mathl!matical Biology (Springer, 1989)
Segel, L.A. Modeling Dynamic PhI!rwmena inMolecularand Cellular Biology (Cambridge, 1984)
MATH316 INDUSTRIAL MODELLING 6cp
Enrolment constraint No more than 10 students will be allowed in anyone presentation of MATH316. The pennission of the presenting lecturer must be obtained before enrolment will be accepted.
Prerequisites 1990 A, CO and F
Prerequisites 1991 MA TH201, MA TH202, MATH203, MATH213 and MATH216
Programming ability (high lcvellanguage) is assumed.
Hours Nominally (see content) 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination Depending on course content either one 2 hour paper or one paper of less than 2 hours duration plus project.
Content
Several 'industrial' models will be examined, each commencing with the problem in non-rigorous verbal form, proceeding to a mathematical formulation, solving the latter and terminating with a discussion of the 'industrial' interpretation of the mathematical results. Here, 'industrial' is meant in the widest possible sense. Models may be taken from some or all of the following industries: finance, commerce, manufacturing, mining, exploralion, defence, scientific, travel and service.
At the same time small groupings of students will be involved in either a joumal-based or an industry-based project. Each group will present a written report on its project, and probably a seminar too.
The following reference list will be supplemented by other materials (e.g. journal references) as required.
56
MA1HEMATICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS ~!?:Bcr""[",O"-N,,F\=VE,"--__________________________ -'P'l:H!1Y{!S;,[CS~~SU~BllJJlE!(cr'!..lD~ES~C~Rt1lPT!'!l[~O,!,N~S
References
Anderssen, RG. & de Hoog, F.R(eds) ThI! Application of Mathl!matics in Industry (Nijhoff, 1982)
Andrews, J.G. & McLone, R.R Mathl!matical Modelling (Butterworths, 1976)
Barton, N.G. (ed) Mathl!matics·in·lndustry Study Group (Proceedings of CSIRO Division of Mathematics and Statistics, 1985, 1988,1989)
Burghes, D.N. & Borrie, M.S. Modelling with Differential Equations (Ellis Horwood, 1981)
Crank, J. Free andMoving Boundary Problems(Oxford U.P., 1984)
Hill, J.M. One-dimensional Stefan problems: An Introduction (Longman, 1987)
K1amkin, M.S.(ed) Mathl!matical Modelling: Classroom notes in Appl' Mathl!matics (S.I.A.M., 1987)
Lin, c.c. & Segel, L.A. Mathl!matics applied to deterministic problems in t natural sciences (Macmillan, 1974)
Neunzert, H.(ed) Proceedings of thl! Second European Symposium Mathematics in Industry (Kluwer Academic, 1988)
Noble,B. Applications of Undergraduate Mathematics Engineering (Macmillan, 1967)
Tayler, A.B. Mathl!matical Models in Applied Mechanics (Claren Press, 1986)
Wan,F.Y.M. Mathl!matical ModelsandThI!ir Analysis(Harper & Row 1989)
MATH317 NUMBER THEORY
Not offered in 1990
Prerequisite 1990 Topic D or K
Prerequisites 1991 MATH102/103
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Divisibility and primes. Linear and qUadratic congruen quadratic reciprocity. Arithmetic functions and Mobius inversi Diophantine equations. Quadratic number fields.
References
Niven, I. & Zuckennan, H. An Introduction to the ThI!ory of Numbers (Wiley, 19
Ireland, K. & Rosen, M. A Classical Introduction to Modern Number ThI!ory (Springer, 1982)
Long, Calvin T. Elementary IntroductiontoNumber Theory (Heath,1982)
Physics SUbject Descriptions PHYSI0l PHYSICS 101 6cp
Advisory Prerequisites HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a result in the top 30% of the candidature or equivalent.
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment during the semester and one 3 hour paper at the end of the semester
Content
This is an introductOl)' course in physics concentrating primarily on the core topics of the HSC physics syllabus. The lecture course, each of 131ectures consists of three main strands:
(1) Mechanics
(2) Electromagnetism
(3) Waves, optics and thermal physics
There will also be 3 hours per week of laboratory and tutorial work
Texts
Serway and Faughn: College Physics 2nd International edn (Saunders College, 1989)
References
Student Study Guide which accompanies the above text
PHYSI02 PHYSICS 102 6cp
Prerequisites 1990 PHYSIOI or Advisory prerequisites of HSC 2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science (with a result in the top 50% of the candidature) and HSC 3 unit Mathematics (with a result inthe top 50% of the candidature or Mathematics IS.
Prerequisites 1991 PHYSI01 or Advisory prerequisites of HSC 2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science (with a result in the top 50% of the candidature) and HSC 3 unit Mathematics (with aresult in the top 50% of the candidature or MATHI01)
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment during the semester, and one 3 hour paper at the end of the semester
Content The lecture course consists of three principal strands, each of 13 lectures, being:
(1) Mechanics
(2) Electromagnetism
(3) Thermal, nuclear and quantum physics
There will also be 3 hours per week associated with laboratory and tutorial work
The subject is arigorous one, utilising calculus, and stressing the unifying principles in the development of the physical concepts. The syllabus provides for discussion of modem applications.
Texts
To be advised
References
Study guide to be advised
57
SECfION FIVE
PHYSI03 PHYSICS 103 6cp
Prerequisites Physics m or PHYSI02
Hours 6 hours per week fOf one semester
Examination Progressive assessment during the semester and one 3 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Content
The lecture course consists of three principal strands each of 13
lectures:
(1) Advanced mechanics and electromagnetism
(2) Waves and optics
(3) Thennal. atomic, and quantum physics
There will also be a total of 3 hours per week associated with laboratory and tutorials.
Thestrands will be matched lothe preceding strandsofPHYSl02, continuing with the rigorous development of basic physics.
Texts
As for PHYSI02
PHYS201 QUANTUM MECHANICS AND 6cp ELECTROMAGNETISM
Prerequisites 1990 Physics IA and Maths I. Maths I may be replaced by Maths IS plus Mathematics 102 (=MATHI99) conversion subject. Students with grade of Credit or better in Physics m may be admitted with approval of the Head of Department
Prerequisites 1991 PHYS103 and MATHI03
Corequisites J990.1beseshouldincludeMATH2Dl Multivariable Calculus and such otller Mathematics 200 level subjects that will satisfy the prerequisites for any Physics 300 level subject.
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment during semester. and one 3
hour paper at end of semester
Content
Basic principles of modem quantum mechanics. and electromagnetic theory. Laboratory. computational and tutorial
work. in these areas.
Texts
To be advised
References
To be advised
PHYS202 MECHANICS AND THERMAL 6cp PHYSICS
Prerequisites 1990 Physics IA and Maths 1. Maths I may be replaced by Maths IS plus Mathematics 102 (=MATHI99) conversion subject. Students with a grade of Credit or better in Physics IB may be admitted with the approval of Head of
Department.
Prerequisites 1991 PHYSI03 and MATHI02
58
PHYSICSSUBlECfDESCRIPTIONS "SE",CfI=O=N-"FIVE=~ ________________________ -"P~HY=SI"CS=S"U",BlE=Cf=D~ES=CRIPTI=-",O",N=S
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 3 hour paper at end of semester
Content
PHYS301 MATHEMATICAL METHODS 6cp AND QUANTUM MECHANICS
Prerequisites 1990 Physics II. Mathematics IT (including topics CO. B and one of topics D and F)
. d d clasSl'cal mecham'cs and "" Prerequisites 1991 PHYS201. MATlUOl and MATH203 Thennal. phySlcs. a vance .... introduction to relativity theory
Texts
To be advised
References
To be advised
PHYS203 SOLID STATE AND ATOMIC PHYSICS
Prerequisites 1990 Physics IA and Maths 1. Maths I may replaced by Maths IS plus Mathematics 102 (=MATHI conversion subject. Students with grade of Credit or better . PhysicsIB may beadmitted with approval of Head ofDepartm
Prerequisites 1991 PHYS201
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one hour paper at the end of the semester
Content
Solid state physics and applications, atomic physics spectroscopy, optics and laser physics
Texts
To be advised
References
To be advised
PHYS204 ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Prerequisites 1990 Physics IA or Physics IB, and Mathemati
lor Maths IS
Prerequisites 1991 PHYS I 02 and MA THI 02
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one hour paper at the end of the semester
Content
Introductory course in analog and digital electroni microcomputer applications and signal processing princip with emphasis on laboratory and measurement applications.
Texis
To be advised
References
To be advised
Hours 21ectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone semester
Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination
Content
Mathematical methods. Quantum mechanics
Texts and References
Refer to the Physics 300 Noticeboard. Students should retain their Physics IT texts
PHYS302 ELECTROMAGNETISM 6cp AND ELECTRONICS
Prerequisites 1990 Physics II. Mathematics II (including topics CO, B and one of topics D and F)
PrerequisiJes 1991 PHYS201 and MATH201
Hours 21ectures and 4 hours laboratory/1utorial per week for one semester
Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination
Content
Electromagnetism
Electronics
Texts and References
Refer to the Physics 300 Noticeboard. Students should retain their Physics IT texts.
PHYS303 ATOMIC, MOLECULAR AND 6cp SOLID STATE PHYSICS
PrerequisiJe 1990 PHYS301
PrerequisiJes 1991 PHYS203 and PHYS30l
Hours 21ectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutorial per week for one semester
ExaminaJion Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination
Content
Atomic and molecular physics. Solid state physics
TexiS and References
Refer to the Physics 300 Noticeboard. Students should retain their Physics IT texts
PHYS304 STATISTICAL PHYSICS 6cp AND RELATIVITY
PrerequisiJe 1990 Physics IT, Mathematics IT (including topics CO. B and one of topics D and F)
Prerequisites 1991 PHYS202 and MA TIl201
Hours 2 lectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutorial per week for one semester
Examination Examinations(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination
Content
Statistical physics
Relativity
Texts and References
Refer to the Physics 300 Noticeboard. Students should retain their Physics II texts
PHYS30S NUCLEAR PHYSICS AND 6cp ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETISM
Prerequisite PHYS302
Hours 2lectures and4 hours laboratory/tutorial per weekforone semester
Exmnination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination
Content
Nuclear physics
Advanced Electromagnetism
Texts and References
Refer to the Physics 300 Noticeboard. Students should retain their Physics IT texts
59
SECTION FIVE
Institute of Aviation AVIAIOI INTRODUCTORY AVIATION
SCIENCE Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
6cp
Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination
Content
The Fundamentals of Navigation, including; the form of the earth; the calculation of tracks and distances on the sphere and spheroid. spherical trigonometry; map projections, confonnality. scale and scale variation; navigational astronomy; the vector triangle.
An Introduction to Pressure Instruments: the International Standard Atmosphere; altimetry; the Altimeter, AS! and VSI, principles, construction, errors and use.
An Introduction to the Compass: earth's magnetism; the directreading magnetic compass, principles. construction, errors and use.
Introduction to meteorology.
Structure of the atmosphere.
Texts
Pallett, E.H.J. Aircraft instruments (Pitman, 1981) Visual FlighJ Guide (CAA 1989)
Bureau of Meteorology Manual of Meteorology - Gene.ral Meteorology Part 1 (AuSi Govt Pub Service, 1975)
Bureau of Meteorology Manual of Meteorology - Aviation Meteorology Part 2 (Aust Govt Pub Service, 1988)
References Air Navigation (H.O. Publication 216, US Government Printing Office 1983)
AVIAI02 INTRODUCTORY AVIATION ENGINEERING
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
6cp
Examination Progressive assessment based on class texts, assignments and tutorials
Content
Aerodynamics: Basic fluid mechanics: conservation of mass, momentum and energy for an incompressible flow. Bernoulli's equation and the measurement of airspeed. The generation of lift. Pressure distributions on aerofoils. Trailing vortices, induced drag, lift-augmentation including wing-tip devices. Form drag and skin friction drag, the importance of Reynolds number. Boundary layers; laminar; transitional and turbulent. Separation and stall. Drag breakdown fortypical aircraft. Propellor analysis: one-dimensional theory and blade element theory. Discussion of general features of propellors.
Engines & Systems: Air standard thermodynamic cycles, actual two stroke and four stroke cycles, engine classification and
60
AVIATIONSUBJECTDESCRWTIONS eSE~CT~I~O~N~F~I~VE~ __________________________________________________ ~~~~~~~~~~~OQ~ AVIATION SUBJECT DESCRWTIONS
construction, efficiency measurement and calculalion, balancing Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments, of reciprocating engines,lubrication and cooling systems, engine tutorials, seminars, and a final 2 hour examination instrumentation.
Texis
Engines & Systems
Bent, R.D., & McKinley, J.L Aircraft Powerplants 5th edn (McGraw-Hill, 1985)
AVIAI03 INTRODUCTORY HUMAN FACTORS IN AVIATION
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
6cp
Examination Progressive assessment based on class texts, seminars, assignments and a 2 hour examination
Content
Vision/Visuallllusions
Balance/Spatiallllusions
Memory
Learning and Skill Acquisition
Attention, Workload and Fatigue
Texts
Wiener, E.L. & Nagel, D.C. (eds) Hwnan Factors in Aviation (Academic Press, 1988)
References
Dhenin, J. (ed) AviationMedicine.. Physiology and Human Factors Vol 1 (1978)
Roscoe. S.N. Aviation Psychology (Iowa State Univ. Press,1980)
AVIAI04 INTRODUCTORY AVIATION 6cp MANAGEMENT
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination
Content
(a) Introduction to Computing: HardwareandsoftwarerelevaD to aviation; aircraft ·based monitoring and control systems; groundbased administration.
(b) Aviation Law: Introductory concepts; Tort law; Contrad law; Aviation techniques.
Texts
Curtin, Dennis P ApplicationSoftware with Wordstar, Twinll-2-3, andB III Plus (Supplied with a disk pack of software, Prenti HalI,1988)
AVIAIOS AVIATION SCIENCE
Prerequisite AVIA101
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Content
(a) Navigation and Navigation Instruments
Navigation: position lines and fixes; air plot and track plot techniques; single-pilot visual navigation; the 1 in 60 rule; elements of flight planning; the point of no return and critical point; radio aids as an aid to pilot navigation
Radio Aids: ADF/NDB/VOR; basic principles, signal propagation, use, errors
Flight Instruments: priociplesof the gyroscope; the Dl, A 1 and tum and balance indicator, their construction. errors and Use; the remote reading compass;
(b) Meteorology: atmospheric and horizontal pressure; wind, humidity and thermodynamics; cloud, precipitation and icing; orographic effects; thunderstorms; tropical meteorology; synoptic situations and fronts; jet streams; hazardous weather: windshear, microbursts and macrobursts.
Texts
Pallett, E.H.J. Aircraft instruments (Pitman. 1981) Visual FlighJ Guide (CAA)
References
Air Navigation (H.D. Publication 216, US Government Printing Office)
AVIAI06 AVIATION ENGINEERING
Prerequisite A VIA 1 02
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment
Content
6cp
Aerodynamics: Introduction to control and stability with emphasis on static stability, Longitudinal and static stability, effects of dihedral. Aircraft penonnance: climb, take-off and landing. Laboratory demonstrations of aerofoil and boundary layer characteristics, trailing vortices.
Engines and Systems: Fuel systems, electrical systems, SUpercharging, hydraulic power systems,landing gear, wheels, ~)'reS, brakes and flaps, airconditioning, oxygenand pressurization, lee rain and fire protection, automatic pilot systems.
Texts
Bent, R.D. & McKinley, J.L. Aircraft Powerplants 5th edn (McGraw Hill. 1985)
References
Anderson, J.D.
Introduction to Flight 3rd edn (1989)
Kcrmode, A.C. Mechanics of Flight 9th edn (1987)
MCCormick, B.W.
Aerodynamics, Aeronautics arul FlighJ Mechanics (1979)
AVIAI07 AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY AND MEDICINE
Prerequisite A VIA 1 03
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
6cp
Examination Progressive assessment based on class texts, assignments, tutorials and a 2 hour examination
ContenJ
(a) Stress, anxiety and arousal; judgement and decision-making; personality, attitudes; intelligence; leadership; emotion; flight phobia; displays and controls; communication.
(b) Hypoxia, decompression, hyperventilation; trapped gases and effects; acceleration and effects; circadian dysrhythmia; vision; hypothermia/hyperthmia; toxic substances and perfonnance.
Texts
Hawkins, Frank H
Human Factors in Flight (Gower, 1987)
References
Dhenin, J. (ed)
Aviation Medicine.. Physiology and Human Factors Voll (1978)
Roscoe, S.N.,
Aviation Psychology. (Iowa State U.P., 1980)
AVIAI08 A VIA TION MANAGEMENT 6cp Prerequisite AVIA104
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment including a final 2 hour examination
Contenl
Enterprise: Small Business success and failure
Organisation
Texis
Reynolds W., Savage W. & Williams, A. Your Own Business: APracticalGuide to Success (Nelson, 1989)
Jackson. J.H. & Musselman, K.A. Business: Contemporary ConceptsandPractices(Prentice HalI,1987)
AVIA201 A VIA TION METEOROLOGY, 6cp NAVIGATION AND INSTRUMENTS
Prerequisite AVIA105
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination
Content
(a) Navigation and Instruments, radio navigation techniques using conventional aids; ADF/NDB, VOR, DME,!LS, RADAR; navigation on the climb & descent; principles and errors of radio
61
SECfION FIVE
and radar aids; PNR's and CP's including off track alternates; enroute and high altitude charts; terminal area charts, approach and landing charts. SIDs; the machmeter.
(b) Upper level forecasting and flying: northern hemisphere climatology; local forecasting; aviation map analysis.
TaJ Aeronautical Information Publication (CAA)
A VIA202 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT AND 6cp JET AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE
Prerequisite AVIAI06
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment
Content
Thermodynamics of a compressible, perfect gas. The effects of compressibility on lift: the Prandtl-Glavert equation, critical. Mach number and drag divergence Mach number. Shock stall. Transonic aerofoils. The reasons for sweepback. Supersonic flow: the Mach case, delta wings, wave drag and associated limitations or wing thickness. The arearuleleading edge separation and vartoc lift at low speeds.
AVIA203 HUMAN FACTORS IN AVIATION 6cp
Prerequisite AVIAI07
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour examination
Content
Personality and attitudes; judgement and decision making; cockpit design; workload, fatigue and vigilance; leadership; accident investigation and safety; recruitment and pilot selection; simulation.
Texts
Jensen, RS, (ed) A vialion Psychology (Gower Publishing Co, 1989)
References
Dhenin, J, (ed) AviationMedicine. Physiology and Human Factors Vol I (1978)
Roscoe, S.N. Aviation Psychology (Iowa State Uni. Pres,1980)
AVIA204 METEOROLOGY AND HIGH SPEEDIHIGH ALTITUDE NAVIGATION
Prerequisite A VIA201
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
6cp
Examination Progressive assessment and a 2 hour examination
Content
Flight planning; jet aircraft petfonnance, take off, climb, cruise, descent, diversion,landing; one-engine out and depressurization
62
A~T[ONSUBrnCTDESCR~ONS ~SE~CT~[O~N~A~VE~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~A~V~[A~T~[O~N~s~UB~rn~CT~D~ES~CR~WT~[O~N~S
contingencies; fuel policy and stationary requirements; the multi. sector flight plan; the Point of No Return and Critical Point in nonnal and abnonnal operations: In-flight replanning.
Texts B727 Performance Manual (CAA)
Texis
Stepniewski, W.Z. & Keys, C.N. Rotary-Wing Aerodynamics (Dover, 1979)
A VIA302 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT 6cp OPERATIONS AND METEORO,LOGY
A VIA20S AERODYNAMICS, ENGINES AND AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
6cp Prerequisite 1990 Diploma of Aviation Science including Aviation ITA
Prerequisite A VIA202
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment
Content
Basic types of gas turbine engines, and their thermodynamic analysis. The flow through turbines and compressors. Blade design and cooling. Elementary theory of combustion, combustor design. Reasons for bypass. Unducted, ultra-high bypass and turboprop engines. Engines for supersonic flight. Future development of propulsion systems.
Control surfaces; asymmetric flight; noise suppression; thnut reversal; fuel, lubrication, cooling, ignition, fire protection systems; turbo-prop operation; the B727-200; flight planning; performance and loading.
AVIA206 A VIA TION INSTRUCTION 6cp
Prerequisite A VIA203
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Prerequisite 1991 Diploma of Aviation Science including AVIA201
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Exmnination Progressive assessment and a 2 hour final examination
Content
Comparative flight plarming. Investigative study of aircraft perfonnance, operational economics, route structure and flight planning. Climates of the world and implications for international aviation.
Texts
References
Worthington, G.D.P. Flight Planning( (Pitman, 1982) 8747 Performance Manual (Qantas, 1985)
Other Performance Manuals and Flight Planning Data as available.
Examination Progressiveassessmentbasedonseminars,exercises A VIA303 (including demonstrated instruction), assignments and a 1 hour
A VIA TION ENGINEERING AND SUPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS
6cp
examination
Content Prerequisite 1990 Diploma of Aviation Science including Aviation IIA
Psychology of learning; evaluating instruction and learning; P·.,equ,'s,"e 1991 Di I f A 'at' S' 'I <Ii .' P oma 0 Vl Ion Clence mc u ng instructional methods; instructional designs; computers and A VIA204 instruction; simulation.
Text
Telfer, R & Biggs, J. The Psychology of Flight Training (Iowa State UniversilJ Press, 1988)
AVIA301 ADVANCED AVIATION ENGINEERING AND STRUCTURES
Prerequisite 1990 Aviation I1A
Prerequisite 1991 AVIA205
Diploma of Aviation Science includina
Diploma of Aviation Science inc1ud:iJ1B
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment
Content
Hours 6 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment
Content
Mathematical approaches to aerodynamics.
Supersonic aerodynamics.
Materials in aircraft structures: aluminum alloys; steel alloys; composites.
Aeroelasticity and "flutter".
Problems of fatigue, degradation and age.
AVIA304 ADVANCED NAVIGATION AND METEOROLOGY
6cp
Prerequisite 1990 Diploma of Aviation Science including Aviation IIA
Helicopter aerodynamics including aero-elasticity and otltff Prerequisite 1991 Diploma of Aviation Science including dynamic-aerodynamic interactions. Experiments on propellmt. A VIA302
rotors and stalling aerofoils. Student project in advance4 ~,OlU's 6 hours per week for one semester aerodynamics. Introduction to structures and properties d materials for aircraft application.
Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination
COnJenJ
Comparative climatology.
Implication for international flight planning and flying.
Localised hazardous climates: Europe; the Atlanticroutes; polar routes; Asia and the Pacific.
Investigative study of advanced navigation systems, present and projected.
Inertial, Omega, VLF, RNav, Loran, SatelliteSystems. Principles, accuracy. economics, use.
63
SECfION FIVE
Psychology Subject Descriptions PSYCIOI PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION 1 6<:p
Hours 5 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Three written laboratory reports.
Introductory Methodology and Statistics for Psychology.
Biological Foundations.
Perception and Learning.
Texts
General-anyrecentcomprehensivetext on General Psychology or Introduction to Psychology. The follOwing alternatives are recommended (others may be added later)
Myers, D.G. Psychology, 1st or 2nd edn (Worth, 1986 or 1989)
Krebs, D. and Blackman, R. P sychoJogy ,a first encounter (Harcourt BraceJ ov anovich. 1988)
For Statistics course
Howell, D.C. Fundamental Statistics for the Behnvioural Sciences 1 8t or 2nd edn (Duxbury, 1985 or 1989)
References To be advised
PSYCl02 PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION 2 6cp
Prerequisite PSYCI01
Hours 5 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Three written laboratory reports.
Cognition.
Social Psychology.
Developmental Psychology.
Texts
General-as for PSYCI01.
For Social Psychology
Callan, V. Gallois, C. & Noller, P. Social Psychology (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1986)
References To be advised
PSYC201 FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY 6cp
Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I
Prerequisite 1991 PSYCI02.
Hours 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with laboratory work.
ExaminLJ.tion One and a half hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises.
64
PSYCHOLOGYSUruECTDESCRWTIONS S~E~Cf~IO~N~F~I~VEE-____________________________________________ ~PS~Y~C~H~O~L~OG~Y~S~U~ru~EC~T~D~ES~CRDYn~~~O~N~S
Content
Will cover
(i) a selection of topics in experimental design, parametric tests, introduction to analysis variance and related topics, and
il) a range of topics aimed at elucidating the anatomy and physiology of the brain. The unit will be accompanied by a tutorial series in which practical experience will be given in the application of statistical methods using computer~assisted statistical packages.
Texts To be advised
References To be advised
PSYC202 BASIC PROCESSES
Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I
Prerequisite 1991 PSYCI02
Corequisites PSYC201 , PSYC203
Hours 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with laboratory work
Examination One and a half hour exam paper plus laboratOIJ exercises
Content
1ms subject will examine basic Processes in Psychology such perception, cognition, and learning. Both animal and hu models may be considered.
The Cognition course will examine two contrasting approac to the study of human intelligence. It will do so within historical contexts of both areas and in doing so will explore strengths and limitations of the scientific method.
The Perception section will deal primarily with audition. following topics will becovered: structure of the auditory syste subjective dimensions of sound, sound localization, elemen aspects of speech perception.
Texis To be advised
References To be advised
PSYC203 DEVELOPMENTAL AND SOCIAL PROCESSES
Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I
Prerequisite 1991 PSYCI02
Corequisites PSYC201 , PSYC202
Hours 2hours per weekfor one semester together with labor work
Examination exercises
Content
This course will cover such topics as Social Cogniti Interpersonal Relationships and Developmental Themes.
The Social Cognition course will continue from the study social behaviours in PSYCI02 and will examine the cogniti processes underlying these behaviours, focussing on attributi
for events and ourunderstanding of social situations, and attitude structure and change.
Text
Forgas, J.P. Interpersonal Behaviours (pergamon, 1985)
References
To be advised
PSYC204 INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES
Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I
Prerequisite 1991 PSYCI02
Corequisites PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203
6cp
Hours 2 hours per weekf or one semester together with laboratory work
Examination One and a half hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises
Content
This course examines the ways in which individuals differ through a study of such topics as models of personality, patterns of abnormal behaviour, methods of assessing these differences.
Abnormal Behaviour: It is intended that this course should introduce the student to some of the main approaches to the understanding of abnonnal behaviour.
The student should be able to demonstrate understanding of: (a) the historical background of mental illness (b) the basic diagnostic categories of psychiatric disorder (c) the symptoms of the major psychoses (d) the symptoms of neurosis (e) approaches to mental health care.
Personality: The course will examine a number of prominent approaches to personality theory, research, and assessment. Students will be expected to read assigned sections of the recommended text, and to complete simple exercises and present material in seminar sessions from time to time.
Texl To be advised
References To be advised
PSYC205 APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 1
Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I
Prerequisite 1991 PSYCI02.
Corequisites PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203.
6cp
Hours 2hours perweekforone semestertogetherwithlaboratory work
Examination One and a half hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises
Content
This course explains the application of Psychological theories With reference to selected areas of human activity such as Human Sexuality, Sports Psychology, and Behaviour Management.
The Human Sexuality course will present some of the basic infonnation necessary for beginning to understand important
issues in human sexuality. The anatomy and physiology of sex as well as the cultural context of sexual behaviourwill be considered.
Sports Psychology involves the application of psychological theories and techniques to the maximisation of sporting perfonnance, and to the psychological well~being of athletes, at all skill levels. This lecture series covers operant and cognitive strategies for improving sporting performance, clinical inteIVention in sport~related crises, and psychological aspects of sport and competition for children and recreational groups.
Text
Martin, G., & Hrycaiko, D. (eds) Behaviour Modification and Coaching (C.c. Thomas, 1983)(On Rem"e)
Shea, J.D. Humnn Sexuality: Psychology lIB. 1989. A set of lecture notes prepared by Dr. Shea, will be available from the bookshop early in the Semester one.
PSYC206 APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 2
Prerequisite 1990 Psychology I
Prerequisites 1991 PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203
6cp
J lours 2 hours per week for one semester together with laboratory work
Examination One and a half hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises
ContenJ
This course explains the application of Psychological theories with r~ference to selected areas of human concern such as human neuropsychological disturbance, and the effects of drugs on behaviour.
N europsychol ogy; It is intended that this course shouldintroduce the sttldent to some of the types of human neurological disturbance and their causes.
Students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of:
(a) infantile neurological dysfunctions and their catlses,
(b) childhood neurological dysfunctions and their causes,
(c) neurological dysfunctions of the elderly and their causes.
Drugs and Behaviour: Discussion will include questions about the classification of Psychoactive drugs, principles of drug actions, drug effects on psychological processes and behaviour, addiction, dependency, and adjunctive behaviotlr.
References To be advised
PSYC30I ADVANCED FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY
Prerequisite 1990 Psychology ITA
Prerequisites 1991 PSYC201. PSYC202, PSYC203
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester
Examination One two and a half hour exam paper
6cp
65
SECfION FIVE
Content
Will cover (i) a selection of topics in experimental design, advanced parametric tests, introduction to analysis of covariance and factor
analysis, and
(ti) a range of topics aimed at eludicating the anatomy and physiology of the brain.
The subject will be accompanied by a tutorial series in which practical experience will be given in the application of statistical methods using computer-assisted statistical packages.
Texts
Howell, D.C. Statistical methods for psychology 2nd edn (Duxburg Press,(987)
References
Kandel, E.R. Principals o/neural science 2nd edn (Elsevier, 1985)
Marascuilo, L.A. & Levin, J.R. Multivariate statistics inthe social sciences: A researcher's guide. (Brooks/Cole, 1983)
Harris, R.J. A primer of multivariate statistics 2nd edn (Academic Press.(985)
PSYC302 INDEPENDENT PROJECT
Prerequ~ite 1990 Psychology IIA
Prerequisites 1991 PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203
Corequisite PSYC301
Hours 2 hours per week for the full year
6cp
ExaminaJion Submission of a written report containing introduction, methods, results and discussion not more than thirty pages in length due early October
Content
The project consists of an experiment or series of experiments, surveys or tests designed to explore a hypothesis. Each student will be supeIVised by an academic staff memberof the Department of Psychology. The list of research areas will be available at the begirming of the academic year. Students are advised that this subject is a prerequisite for entry into an Honours year in
Psychology.
References
Students are expected to read a wide range of current literature in the area chosen for the research project.
PSYC303 ADVANCED BASIC PROCESSES 1 6cp
Prerequisite 1990 Psychology ITA
Prerequisite 1991 PSYC201
Corequisite PSYC301
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester
66
PSYCHOLOGYSUBJECTDESCRWTIONS ~~Cf~IO~N~FI~VE~ ____________________________________________ ~P~S~Y~C~H~O~LOG~Y~S~U~BJE~CT~D~ES~C~RWT~~IO~N~S
Examination One 2 hour exam paper and a laboratory report
Content
This subject will examine basic processes in Psychology such as perception, cognition, memory and learning and the effects of early experience. Topics not covered in this subject will be dealt with in PSYC304. Both animal and human models will be considered. The subject will be supplemented with a laboratory programme which will run over 4-5 weeks.
References
Frisby, J. Seeing (Oxford Univ. Press, 1979)
Sekuler, R. & Blake, R. Perception. (Knopf, 1985)
Osofsky, J.D. Handbook of Infant Development 2nd &In. (Wiley, 1981)
PSYC304 ADVANCED BASIC PROCESSES 2 6cp
Prerequisile 1990 Psychology IIA
Prerequisite 1991 PSYC201
Corequisite PSYC301
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester
Examination One 2 hour exam paper and an analytical report
Content
This subject will extend the examination of basic processes covered in PSYC303. The subject will be complemented by either a laboratory or workshop programme run over about 4-5
weeks.
References
pSYC306 ADVANCED SOCIAL PROCESSES 6cp
prerequisites 1990 Psychology IIA and DB
Prerequisites1991 PSYC201,PSYC202,PSYC203,PSYC204, pSYC 205, PSYC 206
Corequisites PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester
Examination By a combination offonnal examination and essay and one laboratory report
Content
The topic will examine how both motivational and cross-cultural factors influence human behaviour and psychological processes. The unit will beaccompanied by a practicum which will high1ight one aspect of the coursc.
Texts
Petri, H.L. Motivation Theory and Research 2nd edn (Wadsworth, (986)
References
Triandis, H. Handbook of Cross-Cull ural Psychology. 6 Vols.(AUyn & Bacon, (980)
Other references will be given during the lecture series.
PSYC307 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS 6cp IN PSYCHOLOGY 1
Prerequisites 1990 Psychology IIA and lIB
Prerequisitesl991 PSYC201, PSYC202. PSYC203, PSYC204, PSYC205, PSYC206
Aseriesofreadingswillberecommendedasthecourseprogresses Corequisites PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304
/fours 4 hours per week for one semester
PSYC30S INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES
Prerequisites 1990 Psychology IIA and lIB
Prerequisites 1991 PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203, PSYC204,
PSYC205
Corequisites 1990 PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester
Examination One two andahalfhourexam paper,laboratory and workshop reports
Examination Assessment will be by a combination of formal examination and written reports from projects of the student's own design aimed to give experience in field work.
Content
This unit will examine the theory underlying psychological test construction, and will introduce a range of psychological tests through practicum sessions in which training will be given in test administration and interpretation. The underlying basis of interviewing as an assessment technique will also be studied and
Content \ ~ng will be given ininterviewing techniques, the construction ~ use of inteIView schedules and the interpretation of inteIView ~ponses. Video and lape recording will be used extensively.
This subject will look at a variety of topics examining individual psychological processes cultural psychology and organizationlf behaviour. The subject will be extended by laboratory and workshop material.
References
To be advised at the beginning of the academic year
Texts
Ke&s, J. Introduction 10 quantitalive psychology, (Wiley,1971)
1 References
~ "variety of references will be available throughout the ~ation of the course.
PSYC308 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS 6cp IN PSYCHOLOGY 2
Prerequisites 1990 Psychology ITA and lIB
Prerequisites 1991 PSYC201 , PSYC202, PSYC203, PSYC204, PSYC205, PSYC206
Corequisites PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester
Examination Assessment will be by a combination of fannal examination,essaysandwrittenreportsonthepracticalexperience.
Content
This course will examine a number of different areas in which Psychology is applied. It will examine behavioural health care with particular emphasis on community-based inteIVentions in establishing behavioural change. The application of psychological based programmes in eliciting behavioural modifications in developmentally disabled children will also be studied. Finally, the individual's self regulation will be studied with particular reference to biofeedback techniques. The unit will be complemented with some practical experience in applied settings.
Texts
King, N. & Remenyi, A. (eds) Health Care: A behaviouralapproach(Grune& Stratton, (986)
References
References will be made available throughout the duration of the course
PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS)
24cp
Prerequisite 1990 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych), including the subjects Psychology I, Psychology ITA, Psychology lIB, and Psychology IlIA. Candidates must EITHER have a credit or above in Psychology IlIA OR have a credit or above in Psychology IIIB.
Prerequisite 1991 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych), including the subjects Psychology I. Psychology ITA, Psychology lIB, PSYC301, PSYC302, PSYC303 and PSYC304. Candidates must have a credit or above in BOTH PSYC301 and PSYC302 as well as two additional credits in Level 300 Psychology subjects. PSYC305, PSYC306, PSYC307, and PSYC308 arenot compulsory but may be used to obtain the necessary credits.
!lours 12 hours per week for the full year
Examination To be advised
Content
PSYC401 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC402 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402 in the second. PSYC401 consists of five seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in psychology, a choice of two units in biological or physiological psychology, and a choice of two units in applied or social psychology. Each unit will include seminars at which attcndance
67
SECfION FIVE
and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. One seminar may be replaced with a practical placement and associated essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403.
Texts
To be advised
References
To be advised
PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 24cp (THESIS)
Prerequisite 1990 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of a BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych), including the subjects Psychology I, Psychology lIA, Psychology lIB, and Psychology IlIA. Candidates must EITHER have a credit or above in Psychology rnA OR have a credit or above in Psychology mn. Prerequisite 1991 A completed BA or BSc. or tluee complete years of a BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych) including the subjects Psychology I. Psychology IIA, Psychology lIB, PSYC301. PSYC 302, PSYC303 and PSYC304. Candidates must have a credit or aboveinBOTHPSYC301 and PSYC302as well as two additional credits in Level 300 Psychology subjects. PSYC305, PSYC306, PSYC307, and PSYC308 are not compulsory but may be used to obtain the necessary credits.
Corequisite PSYC401
Hours 12 hours per week for the full year
Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by the supervisorandbyanothermember,ormembersoftheDepartment.
Content
PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC401 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402 in the second. PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analysis, and reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis is a formal presentation of this research and must be in APA format. There is a limit of fifty pages. Each student will be supervised by a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. Involvement with external agencies must be tluough official departmental channels.
Texts
To be advised
References
To be advised
PSYC403 PSYCHOLOGY 403 16cp
Prerequisite 1990 Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalent of three full-time years of the degree, including passes or above
68
PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS ~",,,cr",,ICOOc.N,-,F,",IVE= ____________________ ---,C,,O,,MP~UTE,-,-,,,,,R-,S"cC",lE"N .... C"E"S~U'-"B'!'lE"'cr~D""ES~C"'RlPT~'!'IO"'N~S
in Psychology I, Psychology IIA, Psychology lIB, Psychology IlIA, and Psychology lIm.
Prerequisite 1991 Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalem of three full-time years of the degree, including passes or above in Psychology I, Psychology ITA, Psychology lIB, PSYC301, PSYC302. PSYC303. PSYC304. PSYC305. PSYC306. PSYC307. and PSYC308.
Hours 8 hours per week for the full year
Examination To be advised
Content
PSYC403 comprises one third of the final yearofthe BA (psych) or BSc (Psych). Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC404 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 in the first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC403 consists of three seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in psychology, and a choice oft wo units in applied or social psychology. Each unit will include seminars at which attendance and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. There is some overlap with PSYC401.
Texts
To be advised
References
To be advised
PSYC404 PSYCHOLOGY 404 32cp
Prerequisite 1990 Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalem of three full-time years of the degree, including passes or above in Psychology I, Psychology HA, Psychology lIB, Psychology llIA, and Psychology TIIB.
Prerequisite 1991 Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalel1 of three full-time years of the degree, induding passes or abov in Psychology I, Psychology HA, Psychology lIB, PSYC301, PSYC302. PSYC303. PSYC304. PSYC305. PSYC30~ PSYC307. and PSYC308.
Corequisite PSYC403
Hours 16 hours per week for the full year
Examination Reports will be assessed by the supervisor and bJ another member, or members, ofthe Department. Placement wiB be assessed on the basis of supervisor's report and a student essay,
Content
PSYC404 comprises two-thirds of the final year of the BA (Psych) orBSc (Psych). Full-time students are expected to erud in PSYC403 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 ill the first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC404 consists two equally-weighted sections: a piece of original empiri~ research. and aplacement. Theresearch project will besupervi by a member of the Psychology Department and must be in II applied area A report in APA format, of approximately twentJ
five pages, is required. Candidates are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. The placement component involves: introductory seminars on ethical and profeSSional issues; supervised experience in a community facility in the Newcastle area; and the submission of an essay relating the practical activities to psychological theory and technique.
Texts
To be advised
References
To be advised
Computer Science Subject Descriptions COMPIOI COMPUTER SCIENCE I 12cp
Prerequisite. Entry to this subject by students other than those enrolledintheBCompScand BE(ComputerEngineering)degree programmes is limited by quota. See the Faculty Secretary for details.
Content
Introduction to the follOwing aspects of computer science: The design of algorithms. The theory of algorithms. How algorithms are executed as programmes by a computer. The functions of system software (compilers and operating systems). Applications of computers. Social issues raised by computers. An extensive introduction to programming Pascal and afunctional programming language.
COMP201 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES 3cp
Prerequisite COMP101 or COMP102
Corequisite MA TH212
Content
Dasicdatastructuresareinvestigated. TopicscoveredwiUinclude a review of elementary data structures, an introduction to the concept of an abstract data type and the abstraction and implementation of data types selected from lists, stacks, queues, trees, graphs and sets.
COMP202 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE 3cp
Prerequisite COMP203
Content
Provides basic introduction to the logical internal structure of computers and the implementation of computer arithmetic and number handling systems.
COMP203 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
Prerequisite COMPIOI orCOMPI02
ContenJ
3cp
Thecourse is divided into two sections. Thefirst section provides an introduction to computerorgarusation and assembly language programming. Topics covered include data representation, computer structures, registers, addressing modes, instruction sets, subroutines and the use of stacks. The second section of the course is an introduction to operating system principles. Topics covered include process management synchronisation and resource allocation.
COMP204 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE 3cp SEMANTICS
Prerequisite COMP205
Content
Examination of the major concepts which underlie modem programming languages. A variety of programming styles will be compared, including imperative, object-oriented, functional, and logic programming. Representative languages will be
69
SECfION FIVE
introduced to illustrate the concepts behind each style. Programming design issues such as data encapsulation, infonnationhiding, and inheritance will also be studied. Languages studied chosen from C, C++. Lisp, Modula-2, Pascal, Prolog, Scheme, Smalltalk, Ada
COMPlOS PROGRAMMING IN C
Prerequisite COMPIOI or COMPI 02
Content
3cp
C programming for those already proficient in Pascal. Elementary Unix system calls and interfaces to other languages such as Pascal and Assembly Language. Use of UNIX software system tools such as "make", "lint" and "indent".
COMPlO6 THEORY OF COMPUTATION 3cp
Prerequisite MA TH2I2
Content
An introduction to theoretical computer science, covering material in the areas of formal languages, automata theory and computability.
COMP241 COGNITIVE SCIENCE 6cp
Content
An interdisciplinary approach to the examination of models and metaphors of mind,language, knowledge and perception used by various disciplines and the potential applications of those models and metaphors by artificial intelligence researchers, computer scientists and engineers.
COMPJOI COMPILER DESIGN 6cp
Prerequisites COMP201, COMP203, COMP204and COMP206
Content
Introduction to the theory of grammars. Lexical analysers, parsing techniques, object code generation. Design of interpreters. Global and peephole optimisation. Runtime support, error management. Translator writing systems.
COMP302 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 6cp
Prerequisile COMPIOI or COMPI 02
Content
An introductory oveIView to Artificial Inte1ligence, covering some or all of the following topics: history of AI; game playing; knowledge representation; search techniques; natural language processing; expert systems; automatic deduction; theorem proving; computer vision; computer learning; philosophical, psychological, and social issues.
70
COMPVTERSCrnNCESUBJECTDESCR~0N! ~~cr~IO~N~AVE~~ ____________________________________________ ~G~E~OG~R~AP~HY~~S~VBlE~~CT~D~ES~C~Rg~~O~N~S
COMP303 COMPUTER NETWORKS
Prerequisite COMP202
6cp COMP307 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING PRINCIPLES
6cp
Content
Anintroduction 10 datacommunica1ionnetworks. Topicsinclude data transmission, transmission media., network protocols, lS~ OSl, public data networks. local area networks and distributed systems.
COMPJ04 DATABASE DESIGN
Prerequisite COMP201
Content
A basic introduction to database systems, with particularemphasia on relational database systems. Topics covered will include:basie concepts and tenninology, types of systems (hierarchic, relational, network, inverted list), data design, relational theory, relatiOnal algebra, relational calculus, data integrity!recovery, security, concurrency, distributed systems.
Prerequisite COMP201
Content
'[be subject comprises lectures in first semester plus a major assignment in second semester. After a brief explanation of the nature and life-cycle of large software systems, the software crisis which they have created, and the desirable properties of we1l-designed systems, the lectures explore the nature of stable systems in the natural world and in engineering and considerhow humans think about, remember and create complex systems. TIlls leads to the re-evaluation of the principles and techniques used in lheconstruction of major software systems, offering new insights into the concepts of modularity and hierarchical structure.
tOMP308 OPERATING SYSTEMS
Prerequisites COMP201 and COMP202
Content
6cp
COMPJOS ALGORITHM DESIGN Ar;D ANALYSIS
Prerequisite COMP206
6cp An introduction to operating system structure and design. The course begins with a review of process management and interprocess synchronisation, covered as part of the Assembly Language course. New topics covered include advanced
Content
Approaches to the design of computer algorithms with severi important examples. Analysis of algorithm perfonn~ computational complexity, NP-completeness.
COMP306 COMPUTER GRAPHICS
Prerequisites C0MP201, COMP205, MA TH208 andMA TH216
Content
This subject will cover advanced computer graphics topics w relevant mathematical and programming techniques and .. overview of graphics hardware design.
Topics include: Hardware devices for graphics output and inpul; geometrical transfonnations; homogeneous coordinates; plana: projections; c1ippingin 2D and3D modelling and objecthierarchf, standards - GKS, PHIGS; raster algorithms; antialiasing; regi(l filling; 3D shape representation; polygon meshes; parametric cubics. Hermite, Belier and B-splines; transforming CUIVes aol patches, hiddenlineremoval, hiddensutfaceremovalalgori~ shading and texture mapping; diffuse and specular reflecti~ colour modelling; growth models; fractals and particle systetm: animation techniques; advanced graphics hardware architectum: future trends in computer graphics.
synchronisation techniques, deadlock detection, memory management including virtual storage techniques, multiprocessing and file systems. The emphasis will be on practical operating systems. and where possible reference will be made to existing systems currently in use.
Geography Subject Descriptions GEOGIOI INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL 6cp
GEOGRAPHY
Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that GEOG 101 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for the Geography Majorin Arts and Science, and for Geography Honours GEOG401 and GE0G402
HOUTS 2hours lectures and 2hoursof practical work perweekfor one semester. A one-day excursion.
Examination Progressive assessment and one2 hour paper at the end of the semester
Content
An introduction to physical geography including meteorology and climate; theinfluence of geomorphic processeson landforms; weathering, rivers, ice, frost, wind and the sea; the physical, chemical and biological characteristics of the soil and the development of soil profiles; environmental and historica1factors that influence plant distribution.
Practical work includes an introduction to the study of climatic data and maps, and the use of topographic maps and aerial photographs for landform analysis.
Texts
Briggs, D. & Smithson, P. Fundamentals of Physical Geography (Hutchinson papeIback, 1985)
GEOGI02 INTRODUCTION TO HllMAN 6cp GEOGRAPHY
PrereqUisites Nil. Students should note that GEOG 101 and GEOO l02are prerequisites for the Geography Majorin Arts and Science, and for Geography Honours GE00401 and GEOO402
Hours 2hourslecturesand 2hours of practical work per week for one semester. A one-day excursion.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Content
An introduction to human geography including cultural, population, economic, development and urban geography.
Practical work includes an introduction to elementary statistical data and its presentation by thematic maps in human geography. Texts
Haggett.P. Geography; amo<iernsynthesis, 3rdedn paperback (Harper & Row, 1983)
GEOG201 METHODS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY
Prerequisite 1990 Geography I
Prerequisite 1991 GEOOIOI
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment
6cp
71
SECTION FIVE
Content
An introduction to statistics and computing for Physical Geography. Study of cartographic, photographic and aerial photographic methods in geography.
GEOG202 METHODS IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY 6<p
Prerequisite 1990 Geography I
Prerequisite 1991 GEOG102
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment
Content
Introductory methods appropriate to Human Geography: descriptive and inferential statistics will be emphasised and there will be an introduction to computer aided mapping and geographic infonnation systems.
GEOG203 BIOGEOGRAPHY AND 6cp CLIMATOLOGY
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester
Content
An introduction to biogeography. Definition and scope of the subject is examined and its interdisciplinary nature emphasised. Ways of describing and analysing the ranges of organisms in space and time are explored. Some emphasis is placed onrainf orest for the illustration of principles and for the gaining of field experience.
An introduction to climatology on a synoptic and meso-scale including radiation and head budgets; precipitation processes; general circulation; agricultural climatology; applied climatology.
Texts Attenborough, D.
Life on Earth (Fontana/Collins, 1981)
Pears, N. Basic Biogeography 2nd edn (Longman, 1985)
Linacre, E. & Hobbs, J. The Australian Climatic Environment (Wiley, 1983)
GEOG204 GEOMORPHOLOGY OF AUSTRALIA 6cp
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, 2 days field work
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester
Content
Rocks and their weathering, structurallandfonns, soils, slope development and mass movements, fluvial, aeolian and coastal processes and landfonns, glacial and periglacial processes and landforms.
72
GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTION.! !-!!,Bcr~[O"",N-,-F",O"UR"'--______________________ -,G"E"OG"",R"AP",H,-,Y"-"S"UBlE"""C"T __ D"ES"",C"RlPTI""",O"N",S
GEOG20S CONTEMPORARY AUSTRALIA & EAST ASIA
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester
multivariate techniques, computer aided mapping and geographic infonnalion systems.
(JEOGJ03 Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the GEOGRAPHY OF ABORIGINAL
AUSTRALIA 6cp
end of the semester.
Content
Since the Second World War, there have been rapid changes hi Australia's economy, society and political life: this course wi)
consider some geographical aspects ofthese changes, emphasi~ the interaction of people and environment. The influence of geographica1loca1ion on living conditions (current and future) will be examined.
The contemporary economic and social geography of East Asia, concentrating on China and Japan. While population, agricultural, industrial and political changes since World War II are studie4 there is a special focus on Japan since the oil shocks of the 1970. and on China since the death of Mao Zedong. The contributiond geography to an explanation of events occurring during the course is a special focus.
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days fi~ld work
Eiamination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester
Con/ent
'Ibis course examines Aboriginal environments from the prehistoric evidence for settlement through two hundred years of European settlement to the present, and stresses issues such as basic Aboriginal needs and land rights.
GEOG 304 THE BIOSPHERE AND CONSERVATION
Prerequisite GEOG 203
6cp
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 4 days fieldwork
GEOG206 SOCIO-ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the
~ end of the semester
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work ~ Con/ent
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper attij end of the semester.
Content
Anintroductorycourseinsocio-economicgeographywiths~
reference to issues in agricultural, industrial location and development geography.
Biogeography: Emphasis on plant geography, with examination of both the ecological and historical aspects of the subject. A seminar presentation and a small herbarium collection are required of each student.
GEOGJOI ADVANCED METHODS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY
Biological Conservation: An introduction to the subject, in which the importance of an ecologically~based approach is emphasised. Methods for the evaluation of plant and animal species populations and for environmental assessment are
6cp described and analysed.
Prerequisite 1990 Geography lIB
Prerequisites 1991 GEOGI01 & GEOG201
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. This course requires a 5 day field excursion
Examination Progressive assessment
Content
Includes a five day field trip on aspects of climatology, geomorphology, and biogeography where field methods l1li
emphasised. Twelve hours of advanced statistics are included. support to field measurements. The field trip will be schedule.! between semesters or in the second semester break:.
Soils, processes of soil erosion, sediment transport and deposition in the context of the drainage basin; soil conservation issues and metltods.
TexJs
Kellman, M.C. Plant Geography. 2nd edn (Methuen, 1980)
Mowat, F. Woman in the Mists: The Story of Dian Fossey and the Mountain Gorillas of A/rica (Futura, 1989)
Morgan, RP.C. Soil Erosion and Conservation (Longman, 1986)
GEOG30S CLIMATIC PROBLEMS 6cp 6q Prerequisite 1990 Geography lIB GEOG302 ADVANCED METHODS IN
HUMAN GEOGRAPHY
Prerequisite 1990 Geography ITA
Prerequisites 1991 GEOG102 & GEOG202
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment
Prerequisites 1991 GEOG203 Biogeography and Climatology or permission of Head of Department
Hours 4 hours per week for one scmester, 1 day fieldwork
8xamination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester
Conlent COntent
Advanced methods appropriate to Human Geography. Me~ ·lntroduces methods include survey design, questionnaire construction, social analysilo
of establishing palaeoclimates in the
Pleistocene and Holocene, and the reasons behind climate manges over those periods. Describes anthropogenic impacts on climate, throughairpollution,onloca1,regionalandglobalsca1es.Evaluates near-future possible climate variations over the next century.
Recommended Reading
Bradley, R.S.
Quaternary Palaeoclimatology (Allen & Unwin, 1985)
GEOG306 GEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIA: 6<p AN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, 2 days field work
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester
Content
Selected aspects of the population, settlement and land use patterns of Australia. Topics to be studied include; exploratory images, image-makers and distorters, and visions of Australia before 1900; migration to the New World-population of Australia 1788 ~ 1981; urbanisation in Australia; agricultural land use 1788 to 1914.
GEOG307 THE HYDROSPHERE 6cp
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester
Content
The course examines the distribution of waterin the environment. After brief consideration of snow, ice and the oceans, most attention will be given to atmospheric moisture, the hydrologic cycle, catchments and runoff, and soil water.
Texts
Ward, R.C. Principles o/Hydrology, 3rd edn (McGraw-Hill, 1989)
GEOG308 BASIC NEEDS & PATTERNS OF INEQUALITY
Prerequisite 1990 Geography ITA
6cp
Prerequisite 1991 GEOG206 Socio~Economic Geography is a desirable prerequisite/corequisite for this course
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, 2 days field work
Examination One 2 hour paper plus field project report
Content
The course will consider major themes of Basic Needs, inequality and equity that have substantive geographical content, based on case studies from Australia and from diverse economic systems overseas. A field project will be an essential component of the course.
Texts
Smith,D.M. Geography,lnequalityand Society(Cambridge U .P., 1987)
73
SECTION FIVE
Information Science Subject Description INFOIOI INTRODUCTION TO
INFORMATION SYSTEMS 6cp
Hours 3 hours of lectures and 2 hours of tutorials per week for one semester
Content
Computers have made it possible to store and retrieve massive amounts of data. the "information age" is now a reality. This course introduces the skills and concepts needed to fully exploit the power of this new tool.
After completion of the subject students will understand how and why organisations build and use information systems, will be able to document information flow through particular systems, and will be able to use the microcomputer as a personal support tool.
The course provides a solid grounding in computers and their use. which today is important for all students, irrespective of the discipline which they are studying.
Topics covered include;
The evolution of computer hardware and software.
Systems and their characteristics, the components of an Information System (hardware, software, data and people). Examples of computer based Information Systems.
Problems which can/cannot be solved using computers. Types of infonnation systems, fonnal/infonnal, public/private. Types of problems, structured/unstructured.
The computer as a personal support tool, word-processing, spreadsheets, data base management
Systems Analysis, understanding and documenting information systems, structured analysis and design, dataflow diagrams, data dictionaries, modularity, infonnation hiding.
Theimportance of people in the information network, the social, organisational and personal implications of computer based information systems.
Extending the information network, the need for integration of data. Networks (LANs, WANs, etc), electronic mail, electronic data interchange.
Future trends, Decision Support, End User Computing, Expert Systems, SOL's, alternative development methodologies.
References
Behan, K. and Holmes, D. Understanding Information Technology (Prentice-Hall, 1986)
DeMarco, T. Structured Analysis and System Specification (PrenticeHall,I978)
Gane, C. and Sarson, T. Structured Systems Analysis: Tools and Techniques (Prentice-Hall,I979)
Ingalsbe, L.
74
Business Applications Software for the IBM PC (Merrill, 1988)
INFORMATION SCIENCE SUBJECT DHSCRIPTI
Jackson, M.A. Principles of Programme Design (Academic Press, 197
Shelly, G Cashman, T., et al Computer Concepts with Microcomputer Applicatio (Boyd & Fraser, 1989)
Shore,B. Introduction to Computer Information Systems (H.R W 1988)
Szymanski, R., Syzmanski, D., et al Introduction to Computers and Information Syste (Merrill, 1988)
SECTION FIVE
Statistics Subject Descriptions [)elails of courses offered by the Department of Statistics can be obtained from the Departmental Secretary or from the Head of the Department.
STATIO! INTRODUCTORY STATJSTIC~ 6cp
Prerequisites This course does not assume knowledgeof calculus or matrix algebra
Hours 3 lecture hours, I laboratory hour and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester
Content
Introduction to the principles of study design, data analysis and interpretation; the statistical computing programme MINIT AB will be used extensively.
Study design, including surveys and controlled experiments. Sampling and randomization. Scales of measurement. Descriptive and exploratory data analysis. Probability. Statistical inference:
. sampling distributions, confidence intervals and hypothesis tests for means and proportions. Correlation and regression. Time series analysis. Chi-square tests for frequency tables.
Texts To be decided.
References
Freedman, D., Pisani, R. and Purvis, R. Statistics (Norton, 1978)
Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. and Ryan, T.A. MINrrAB Handbook 2nd edn (Duxbury, 1985)
Miller, R.B. MINrrAB Handbook/or Business and Economics (PWSKent, \988) MINrrABRe/erence Manual (1986)
Statistics Part of Mathematics 103
MA THI03 is the most advanced 100 level Mathematics subject and it has MATHI02as a prerequisite. The Statistics part is one quarter of the subject MA THI 03 and it involves 1 lecture hour per week and I tutorial hour per fortnight contact time.
The course will be offered in semester 2 in 1990 and in both semesters in subsequent years.
As students will be more familiar with University-level ·mathematical subjects and computing, the course will proceed faster than STATlot. Nevertheless several topics will not be covered in as much depth ,and regression, time series and chisquared tests will not be included. The statistical computing programme MINITAB will be used extensively.
Content
Study design, including surveys and controlled experiments. '.Randomization and sampling. Scales of measurement. Descriptive -.rtd exploratory data analysis. Statistical inference for sampling ; distributions related to the Normal distribution. Confidence ~tervals. Comparisons of means and proportions.
·Text To be advised
STATISTICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
References
Freedman, D., Pisani, R and Purvis, R. Statistics (Norton,1978)
Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. and Ryan, T.A. MlNrrAB Handbook 2nd edn (Duxbury, \985) MINrr AB Reference Manual (1986)
STAT201 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS 6cp
Prerequisite In 1990, Mathematics I and from 1991 either MA THI 03 or ST A Tl 01 Introductory Statistics and MATHI02 (or a level of mathematics equivalent to MATHI02)
Hours 3 lecture hours and Ilaboratory!tutorialhourperweekfor one semester
Content
Probability theory, random variables, probability distributions. Sampling distributions, parameter estimation, confidence intervals. Hypothesis testing, significance levels, power. t-, Fand chi-squared tests. Quality control.
Text
Larsen, R.J. and Marx, M.L. An Introduction to Mathematical Statistics and jts Applications 2nd edn (Prentice Hall, 1986).
STAT202 REGRESSION ANALYSIS 6cp
Prerequisites In 1990, ST A T201 Mathematical Statistics and from 1991 STAT201 Mathematical Statistics or STATlot Introductory Statistics and MATH102 (or equivalent)
Hours 2 lecture hours, 1 laboratory and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester
Simple linear and multiple regression. Linear models. Variable selection. Diagnostics. Regression approach to analysis of variance. Non-linear regression.
This course covers the practical and theoretical aspects of multiple regression analysis, including matrix derivations of parameters, the assumptions underlying normal linear models, confidence intervals and prediction, variable reduction methods, examination of the adequacy of models, analysis of variance and covariance, interaction tenus and statistical computer packages.
Texts To be advised
References
Draper, N.R. and Smith, H. Applied Regression Analysis (Wiley, 1981)
Daniel, C. and Wood, F.S. Fitting Equations to Data (Wiley, 1971)
Seber, G.A.F. Linear Regression Analysis (Wiley, 1977)
STAT203 QUEUES & SIMULATION 3cp
Prerequisites In 1990, Mathematics I or Mathematics IS and from 1991 MATHI02. FortheBSc. degreeSTAT204 would also have to be taken.This course covers topics specifically required for Computer Science but is also relevant fOT Statistics and other disciplines.
75
SEcrlON FIVE
Hours 21ecture/laboratory hours per week for one semester
Content
Queues. Random number generation. Simulation, including the use of SIMSCRIPT.
References
Morgan, B.l.T. Elements of Simulation (Chapman and Hall, 1984)
Ross, S. Stochastic Processes (Wiley, 1983)
STAT204 NON-PARAMETRIC STATISTICS 3cp
Prerequisites In 1990, STA T20t Mathematical Statistics and from 1991 STAT20} Mathematical Statistics or STATIO} Introductory Statistics and MATHI02 (or equivalent).For the BSc. degree STAT 203 would also have to be taken.
Hours 21ecturellaboratory hours per week for one semester
Conlenl
Chi-square tests for goodness arfit and contingency tables. Rank tests. Robust methods of data analysis.
Text To be advised
STAT20S ENGINEERING STATISTICS 3cp
Prerequisite 1990 Mathematics 1
Prerequisite 1991 MATHI02.This subject is mainly taken by students in Mechanical or Industrial Engineering but is also available to other students.
HOUTS 2lecture/laboratory hours per week for one semester
Content
Basic probability theory and principles of statistical inference. Distributions. Error propagation. Quality control.
T ex! To be advised
References
Chatfield, C. Statistics for Technology 3rd edn (Chapman and Hall, 1983)
Guttman, I., Wilks, S.S. & Hunter J.S Introductory Engineering Statistics 3rd edn (Wiley, 1982)
STATJOI STATISTICAL INFERENCE 6cp
Prerequisites In 1990, Statistics II and from 1991 STAT201 Mathematical Statistics, STA 1'202 Regression Analysis and MA TH201 (or a level of mathematics equivalent to MA TH201, i.e. multivariable calculus).
HOUTS 3 hours per week for one semester
Content
Statistical inference is the drawing of conclusions from data and this course is concerned with the theory and practice of that process. The main emphasis is on likelihood-based methods of estimation and hypothesis - testing, but other topics to be covered may include: special distributions, transfonned variables, some re-sampling and other computer-based techniques. 76
STATISTICS SUBJEcr DESCRIPTIONS
References
Kalbfleisch, J.G. Probability and StaJisticallnj'erence II (Springer, 1979)
Hogg, R.Y. and Craig, A.T. Introduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Collier MacMillan, 1978)
Silvey, S.D. Statistical Inference (Chapman and Hall, 1978)
Cox, D.R. and Hinkley, D.V. Theoretical Statistics (Chapman and Hall, 1974)
STATJ02 STUDY DESIGN
Prerequisite 1990 Statistics II
6cp
Prerequisites 1991 STATI01 Mathematical Statistics and ST A 1'202 Regression Analysis
HOUTS 3 hours per week for one semester
Contenl
This course contrasts two methods for collecting and analysing data: experimental studies and non -experimental studies including surveys. The topics included to illustrate the principles of experimental design are completely randornised designs, randomised block designs and factorial designs. For sUlVeys the topics include: simple random sampling, stratified and clUster sampling, ratio and regression estimators. Class projects are used to illustrate practical problems and the statistical packages BMDP and SAS are used to carry out analyses.
Text To be advised
References
Cochran, W.G. Sampling Techniques 3rd edn (Wiley, 1977)
Kish, L. Survey Sampling (Wiley, 1965)
Neter, I., Wasserman, W. & Kutner, M.H. Applied Linear Statistical Models (Irwin, 1983)
Cochran, W.G. & Cox, G.M. Experimental Designs (Wiley, 1964)
Box, G.E.P., Hunter, W.G. & Hunter I.S. Statistics for Experiments (Wiley, 1978)
STATJ03 GENERALIZED LINEAR MODELS 6q>
Prerequisites STA TIOI Statistical Inference
HOUTS 3 hours per week for one semester
Content
The course covers the theory of generalized linear models and illustrates the ways in which methods for analysing continuous, binary, and categorical data fit into this framework. TopiCS include the exponential family of distributions, maximum likelihood estimation, sampling distributions for goodness-of-fit statistics, linear models for continuous data (regression and analysis of variance), logistic regression, and log-linear modeIs. Students will implement these methods using various computet packages, including GUM.
§!lCTION FIVE
Text pobson, A.I.
An Introduction to Generalized Linear Modelling (Chapman & HaIl, 1989)
References
McCullagh, P. and NeIder J.A. Generalized Linear Models (Chapman & Hall, 1983)
Aitkin, M. et al. Statistical Modelling in GLIM (Oxford Science Publications, 1989)
STATJ04 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS
Prerequisites STA TIOI Statistical Inference
HOUTS 3 hours per week for one semester
Content
6cp
This course is about the theory and practice of Time Series Analysis· the analysis of data collected at regular intervals in time (or space). Topics covered include: stationary processes, ARMA models, models for periodic phenomena, analysis using MINIT AD and other Time Series packages.
References
Cryer, J.D. Time Series Analysis (Duxbury Press, 1986).
Fuller, W.A. Introduction to Statistical Time Series (Wiley, 1976).
Box, G.E.P. & Jenkins, G.M. Time Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control (Holden Day, 1976).
EXTRANEOUS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Extraneous Subjects EDUC211 MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 211 6cp
Prerequisite At least 36 credit points at the 100 level for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree
Examination Progressive assessment based on perfonnance in tutorials, preparation of short reports on the nature and history of mathematics taught in schools and completion of self-evaluation procedures. A statement of attainment will be given to each student. The grade to be awarded is Ungraded Pass.
HOUTS 2 hours per week for one semester
Content
Views ofMalhematics; the History of Mathematics; Mathematics in Different Cultural,SocialandIntellectual Contexts; the Nature and Content of School Mathematics.
The course requires active participation by students in preparing and presenting material for group discussion and tutorials dealing with the nature and history of mathematics taught in schools.
Reference
McQualter I.W. A Brief History of Nwnber, Computation, Algebra, Geometry, Trigonometry, The Calculus and Statistics and Probability (Dept. of Education, University of Newcastle Education Research Report 1985)
EDUC212 MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 212 6cp
Not offered in 1990
Prerequisite At least 36 credit points at the 100 level for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree and Mathematics Education 202
lIours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment based on perfonnance in tutorials, preparation of case study reports and completion of self-evaluation procedures. A statement of attainment will be given to each student. The grade to be awarded is Ungraded Pass.
Content
Teacbingand Learning Mathematics; Planning and Implementing MathematicsLeamingActivities,CommunicatingMathematical Ideas, Negotiating Mathematical Meaning, How People Learn Mathematics.
The course requires active participation by students in preparing and presenting material for group discussion and tutorials dealing with ways of teaching and learning school mathematics. Each student will be expected to prepare a case study. The case study is a report of how an individual school pupil has learned school mathematics. It records pupil background, pupil learning problems, methods used to diagnose the learning problems, remedial action taken and evaluation procedures used todeterrnine pupil success.
Reference
PolyaG. How To Solve It 2nd edn (Princeton U.P., 1973).
77
SEcriON FIVE
EDUC311 MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 311 6cp
Not offered in 1990
Prerequisite At least 42 credit points from subjects at the 200 level of the Bachelor of Mathematics degree and Mathematics Education 201
HOUTS 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment based on perfonnance in tutorials, preparation of short reports on lhe nature and hiSloryof mathematics taught in schools and completion of self·evaluation procedures. A statement of attainment will be given to each student. The grade to be awarded is Ungraded Pass.
Content
Views of Mathematics; the History of Mathematics; Mathematics in Different Cultural, Social and Intellectual Contexts; theNature and Content of School Mathematics.
The course requires active participation by students in preparing and presenting material for group discussion and tutorials dealing with the nature and history of mathematics taught in schools.
References
Howson A.G. Wilson B. School Mathematics in the 1990' s.(Cambridge U.P,1986)
Kline M. Mathematics: The Loss of Certainty (Oxford U.P, 1980)
EDUC312 MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 312 6cp
Not offered in }99O
Prerequisites At least 42 credit points from subjects at the 200 level of the Bachelor of Mathematics degree and Mathematics Education 202
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment based on preparation of a seminar paper and completion of self·evaluation procedures. A statement of attainment will be given to each student. The grade to be awarded is Ungraded Pass.
Content
Teaching and Learning Mathematics; Planning and Implementing MathematicsLearning Activities, Communicating Mathematical Ideas, Negotiating Mathematical Meaning, How People Learn Mathematics.
The course requires active participation by students in preparing and presenting material for group discussion and tu lorials dealing with ways ofteaching and learning school mathematics. Students will be expected to work as teacher aides in schools during some part of the year so they can prepare case studies on how people learn mathematics in groups.
References
Schoenfeld A. (ed)
78
Cognitille Science and MalhemaJics Education (Erlbaum NJ.1987)
EXTRANEOUS SUBffiCT DESCRWfIONS SECTION SIX
POSTGRADUA1E DEGREE REGULATIONS
Postgraduate Courses Studies may be undertaken for the following postgraduate qualifications:
Coursework Honours Degrees
Bachelor of Science (Honours)
Bachelor of Mathematics (Honours)
Diploma (Postgraduate)
Diploma in Coal Geology
Diploma in Mathematical Studies
Diploma in Psychology
Diploma in Science
Coursework Masters Degrees
Master of Scientific Studies
Research Degrees
Master of Mathematics
Master of Psychology (Clinical)
Master of Psychology (Educational)
Master of Science
Doctor of Philosophy
Bachelor of Science (Honours)
This is a separate degree to the Bachelor of Science (or equivalent qualification). It may be undertaken full·time over one year of study or part-time over two years. To qualify, candidates must pass one of the following combinations of SUbjects: Biology 401 and 402, Chemistry 401 and 402, Geography 401 and 402, Geology 401 and 402, Geology 401 and Mathematics 401, Physics 401 and 402, Physics 401 and Mathematics 401, Psychology 401 and 402, or Psychology 401 and Mathematics 401.
Bachelor of Mathematics (Honours) This degree is separate from the undergraduate Bachelor of Mathematics degree and may be taken fUll-time over one yearof study or part-time over two years. Students may choose one set of subjects from the following: Mathematics 401 and 402, Mathematics 401 and Economics 401, Mathematics 401 and Geology 401, Mathematics 401 and Physics 401, Mathematics and Psychology 401. Students may undertake 48 credit points in Statistics, chosen from STAT401, STAT402, STAT403, STAT404.STAT405.STAT406.STAT408.STAT409.STAT410 andSTAT411.
Diploma in Coal Geology (Not offered in 1990)
This is a specialist postgraduate diploma for graduates of this or another university who have completed a recognised degree including amajor sequence in Geology, or equivalent qualification. It is intended for those candidates who wish to enter the coal industry but have insufficient qualifications in the area of Coal Geology. It requires part-time attendance at the University over a minimum period of two years.
Diploma in Mathematical Studies This course is intended for graduates who wish to study more Mathematics than was available in their first degree. The course is sufficiently flexible to meet most graduates' needs.
Diploma in Science Graduates completing this postgraduate diploma must undertake two 400 level subjects from those subjects offered in the course leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science (Honours).
79
SECTION SIX
Master of Scientific Studies This is a coursework Masters degree which involves both lectures and the pursuit of an investigation which leads to a report. The prerequisite requirement is an Honours degree or a Diploma in Science, or equivalent qualification.
Master of Mathematics This is a Research degree by thesis requiring original contribution to knowledge in the area of Mathematics or Statistics. Entry would nonnally require an Honours degree. Enrolment can take place at any time in the year. Scholarships are available (competitively); applications close about October each year.
Master of Psychology (Clinical) and Master of Psychology (Educational) Thesedegreesaretwopostgraduatetrainingooursesinprofessional Psychology. Both courses require successful completion of coursework. practicum and research components. The prerequisi Ie for the Master of Psychology (Clinical) course is an Honours degree in Psychology or equivalent, and, for the Master of Psychology (Educational) course, a Bachelors degree majoring in Psychology, a teaching qualification and two years teaching experience or equivalent.
Applications for admission to the course close on October I each year and attendance at interviews is required generally in October! November in the year preceding intake.
Master of Science/Doctor of Philosophy These are research degrees involving the production of a thesis which advances the state of knowledge in the chosen discipline. Entry requirements are set out in the University Regulations. Prospective candidates should consult the Head of Department in the appropriate specialization.
80
POSTGRADUA'IE COURSES SECTION SIX
Regulations Relatingto the Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science 1. General
These Regulations prescribe the requirements for the Honours degree of Bachelorof Science of the University ofNew?Nle and are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-Law 5.2.1.
Z. Definitions
In these Regulations, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:
"course" means the total requirements prescribed from time to lime to qualify a candidate for the degree;
"Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty;
"the degree" means the degree of Bach elor of Science (Honours);
"Department" means the Department or Departments offering particular subjects and includes any other body so doing;
"Faculty" means the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;
"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty;
"Honours Subject" means a 24 point 400 level subject.
3. Admission to Candidature
In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree an applicant shall:
(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary degree of Bachelor of Science of the University of Newcastle or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board, or have already been admitted to that degree;
(b) have completed any additional work prescribed by the Head of the Department offering the honours subjects; and
(c) have obtained approval to enrol given by the Dean on the recommendation of Head of the Department offering the honours subject.
4. Qualification for Admission to the Degree
(l)Toqualify for admission to the degree acandidate shall, in one year of full-time study or two years of part-time study, complete two honours subjects for a total credit point score of 48 points.
(2)Students undertaking study in one discipline shall enrol in and pass two honours subjects offered by the one Department, to be chosen from:
Biology 401 and 402
Chemistry 401 and 402
Geography 401 and 402
Geology 401 and 402
Physics 401 and 402
Psychology 401 and 402
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) DEGREE REGULATIONS
(3)Students undertaking study in a combined Honours degree shall enrol in one honours subject from each of two Departments, in one of the following combinations;
Geology 401 and Mathematics 401
Mathematics 401 and Physics 401
Mathematics 401 and Psychology 401
The Head of each Department shall prescribe the contents of these honours subjects which may contain coursework, projects or athesis from any 400 level subject offered by that Department.
5. Subject
(1) To complete an honours subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars, laboratory classes and field work and submit such written or other work as the Department shall require.
(2) To pass an honours subject a candidate shall complete it and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.
6. Withdrawal
(1) A candidate may withdraw from an honours subject only by infonning the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.
(2) A candidate who withdraws from an honours subject after the Monday of the third week of second semester shall be deemed to have failed in the subject save that, after consulting with the Head of Department, the Dean may grant pennission for withdrawal without penalty.
7. Classes of Honours
There shall be three classes of honours: Class I, Class II and Class 1lI. Class IT shall have two divisions, namely Division I and Division 2.
8. Relaxing Provision
In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any provision of these Regulations.
81
SECTION SIX BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) SUBJECTS
LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS REFERRED TO IN THE HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Entry to an Honours degree requires a Credit or beuer average in appropriate Part III (pre-l990) or 300 level subjects.
Number Subject
BIOlAOI Biology Honours 401
BIOlA02 Biology Honours 402
CHEM401 Chemistry Honours 401
CHEM402 Chemistry Honours 402
GEOG401 Geography Honours 401
GEOG402 Geography Honours 402
GEOlAOl Geology Honours 401
GEOlA02 Geology Honours 402
PHYS401 Physics Honours 401
PHYS402 Physics Honours 402
PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401
PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402
F""Full Year
Sl=Semester 1
S2=Semester 2
82
Credit Points Value When
24 F
24 F
24 F
24 F
24 F
24 F
24 F
24 F
24 F
24 F
24 F
24 F
Prerequisites! Corequisites 1990
Biology rnA or lIIB
B10lAOl
Chemistry llIA
arIIm
CHEM401
Geography IlIA or lIB
GEOG401
Geology IlIA or lIB
GEOlAOI
Physics ilIA
(Credit Average)
PHYS40l
Consult Department
PSYC40l
Prerequisites! Corequisites 1991
Consult Department
B10lAO!
Any 4 Level 300
at Credit Grade
CHEM401
GEOG!Ol & 102
and either
(GEOG201 & 301)
or
(GEOG202 & 302)
GEOG401
GEOL3Ol & 302
GEOlAOI
Any 4 PHYS300
PHYS401
Consu1t Department
PSYC401
§ECTIONSIX
Regulations Governing the Honours Degree of Bachelor of Mathematics 1. These regulations prescribe the requirements for the Honours degree of Bachelor of Mathematics ofthe University of Newcastle and are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-Law 5.2.1.
2. Definitions
IntheseRegulations,unlessihecontextorsubjectmatterotherwise indicates or requires:
"wurse" means the programme of studies prescribed from time to time to qualify a candidate for the degree;
"Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty;
"the degree" means the degree of Bachelor of Mathematics (Honours);
"Department" means the Department or Departments offering particular subjects and includes any other body so doing;
"Faculty" means the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;
"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty;
"Honours subject" means a 24 point 400 level subject.
3. Admission to Candidature
In orderla be admitted to candidature for the degree, an applicant shall
(a) havecompleted the requirements for admission to the Ordinary degree of Bachelor of Mathematics of the University of Newcastle or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board, or have already been admitted to that degree;
(b) have satisfactorilY completed any additional work prescribed by the Head of the Department offering the honours subject; and
(e) have obtained approval to enrol given by the Dean on the recommendation of the Head of the Department offering the honours subject.
4. Qualification for Admission to the Degree
(1) To qualify for admission to the degree acandidate shall, in one year offull-time study ortwo years of part-time study, complete two honours subjects for a total credit point score of 48 points.
(2) Students undertaking study in Mathematics shall enrol in and pass Mathematics 401 and 402. *Students undertaking study in Statistics shall enrol in 48 credit points to be chosen, with the approval ofthe Head of Department, from STAT401, STAT402, STAT403, STAT404, STAT405, STAT406, STAT408, STAT409, STAT4iO and STAT4I!.
·Subject 10 Council Approval
BACHELOR OF MA TIlEMA TICS (HONOURS) REGULATIONS
(3) Students undertaking study in a combined honours degree shall enrol in one honours subject from each of two Departments, in one of the follOwing combinations:
Economics 401 and Mathematics 401
Geology 401 and Mathematics 401
Mathematics 401 and Physics 401
Mathematics 401 and Psychology 401
The Head of each Department shall prescribe the content of these honours subjects which may contain coursework, projects or a thesis from any 400 level subject offered by that Department.
s. Subject
(1) To complete an honours subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars, laboratory classes and field work: and submit such written or other work as the Department shall require.
(2) To pass an honours subject a candidate shall complete it and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.
6. Withdrawal
(1) A candidate may withdraw from an honours subject only by infonning the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.
(2) A candidate who withdraws from an honours subject after the Monday of the third week of second semester shall be deemed to have failed the subject save that, after consulting with the Head of the Department, the Dean may grant permissionforwithdrawal without penalty.
7. Classes of Honours
There shall be three classes of honours: ClassI, Class II and Class ID. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division 2.
8. Relaxing Provision
In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any provision of these Regulations.
83
SEcrIONSIX
confennent or award. Further. such standing shall not contribute any more than twenty·four credit points towards the Diploma.
8.(1) To complete a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars and laboratory classes and submit such wriuen work as the Faculty Board may require.
(2) To pass a subject a candidate shall complete it and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board may require.
9.(1) A candidate may withdraw from emolment in a subject or the Diploma only bynotifying the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.
(2) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permissionby the Dean to withdraw without penalty. The relevant date shall be:
(a) in case of a subject offered only in the first semester, the Monday of the ninth week of the first semester;
(b) in case of a subject offered only in the second semester, the Monday of the ninth week of second semester;
(c) in case of any other subject, the Monday of the third week of second semester.
10. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases, the Senate, on the recommendation of the Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these Regulations.
86
POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA REGULATIONS
Requirements for the Diploma in Psychology General
1. There shall be a Diploma in Psychology.
2. In these Requirements, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:
the "Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;
the "Board of Stud ies" means the Board of Studies in Psychology; and
the "Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.
3. A candidate for the Diploma shall register in one of the following specialisalions:
(a) Clinical Psychology; or
(b) Educational Psychology.
4, The Diploma shall be awarded in one grade only.
S. A candidate may withdraw from the course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.
6. In exceptional circumstances, the Senate may, on the recommendation of the Faculty Board, relax any provision of these Requirements.
Clinical Specialisation
7. An applicant for registration as a candidate forthe Diplomain the Clinical Specialisation shall:
(a) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to a Bachelor's degree with honours in Psychology in the University of Newcastle or to such a degree in another university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; and
(b) be selected for admission to the course by the Board of Studies which shall, in making this determination, take account of the applicant's academic qualifications, experience, and thereportof an intetview which shall be conducted by a selection committee which the Board shall appoint.
8. (a) Notwithstanding the provision of subsection (1) of Section 7, the Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Board of Studies, may pennit to register as a provisional candidate a person who has satisfied all of the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle or another university approved forthis purpose by the Faculty, provided that the course completed for that degree by the applicant included a major study in Psychology.
(b)A candidate permitted to register provisionally under the provisions of subsection (1) of this Section shall complete such work and pass such examinations at Bachelor's degree honoWS level as may be prescribed by the Faculty Board before hiS registration may be confinned by the Faculty Board.
SECTION SIX
9. A candidate for the Diploma in the Clinical Specialisation shall, in not less than two years of part-time enrolment, attend sUch lectures, seminars and tutorials; complete such written and practical work; and pass such examinations as may be prescribed by the Board of Studies.
Educational Specialisation
10. An applicant for registration as a candidate for the Diploma in the Educational Specialisation shall:
(a) (i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to a Bachelor's degree in the University of Newcastle and have included in the qualifying course f orthat degree at least four 300 level Psychology subjects
or
(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to an equivalent qualification in another university recognised for this purpose by the Faculty Board;
(b) have satisfied all of the requirements for the award of the Diploma in Education of the University of Newcastle or another teaching qualification approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board;
(c) have at least two years teaching or other relevant practical experience approved by the Board of Studies; and
(d) beselecled for admission lothe course by the Board of Studies which shall, in making this determination, take account of the applicant's academic qualifications; experience; and the report of an intetview which shall be conducted by a selection committee which the Board shan appoint.
11. A candidate forthe Diplomain the Educational Specialisation shall, in not less than two years of full-time enrolment or an equivalent period of part -time enrol ment, attend lectures, seminars and tutorials; complete such written and practical work; and pass such examinations as may be prescribed by the Board of Studies.
POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA REGULATIONS
Regulations Governing the Diploma in Science 1. These Regulations prescribe the requirements forthe Diploma in Science of the University of Newcastle and are made in accordance with the powers vested in the Council under By-law 5.2.1.
2. In these Regulations, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:
"Department" means the Department offering the subject in which a person is enrolled or is proposing to enrol;
"Diploma" means the Diploma in Science;
"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics;
"a Subject" means a 24 point 400 level subject offered in the course leading to the Honours degree of Bachelor of Science.
3. (1) An applicant for admission to candidature for the diploma shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle, or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of any other tertiary institution.
(2) An applicant shall have met such requirements for entry to a subject as may be prescribed from time to time by the Head of the Department and approved by the Faculty Board or have achieved at another tertiary institution a standard of perfonnance deemed by the Head of the Department to be equivalent
4. (1) To qualify forthe Diploma, acandidate shall enrol and shall complete two subjects to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board.
(2)Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, the two subjects shall be satisfactorily completed in notless than one year of full-time study or not less than two years of part· time study.
5. To complete a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars and laboratory classes, and submit such written and other work as the Faculty Board may require and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board may preScribe.
6. (1) A candidate may withdraw from asubject only by notifying the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.
(2) A candidate who withdraws from a subject after the Monday of the third week of second semester shall be deemed to have failed in the subject save that, after consulting with the Head of Department, the Dean may grant permission for withdrawal without penalty.
7. The Diploma shall be awarded in one of three classes,namely Class I, Class II and Qass m. Class II shall have two divisions. The Gasses shall indicate a level of achievement comparable with that of a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Honours).
8. The Diploma shall specify the subjects completed.
9. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases, the Senate, on the recommendation of the Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these Regulations.
87
SECfIONSIX
Regulations Governing Masters Degrees Part I - General 1. (1 ) These regulations prescribe theconditions and requirements relating to the degrees of Master of Architecture, Master of Arts, Master of Commerce, Master of Computer Science, Master of Computing, Master of Education, Master of Educational Studies, Master of Engineering, Master ofEnginecring Science, Masterof Enrivonmental Studies, MasterofLaw, MasterofLeuers. Master of Mathematics, Master of Psychology (Oinica1), Master of Psychology (Educational), Mastera! Science, Master of Medical Science, MastcrofMedical Statistics, MasterofScientificStudies. Master of Special Education and Master of Surveying.
(2) In these Regulations and the Schedules thereto, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:
"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty responsible for the course in which a person is emolled or is proposing to emol;
"programme" means the programme of research and study prescribed in the Schedule;
"Schedule" means the Schedule of these Regulations pertaining to the course in which a person is enrolled oris proposing toemol; and
"thesis" means any thesis or dissertation submitted by a candidate.
(3) These Regulations shall not apply to degrees conferred Iwnoris causa.
(4) A degree of Master shall be conferrcd in one grade only.
2. An application for admission to candidature for a degree of Master shall be made on the prescribed fonn and lodged with the Secretary to the University by the prescribed date.
3.(1) To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:
(a) (i) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor in the University of Newcastle as specified in the Schedule; or
(ii) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree or equivalent qualification, approved for the purpose by the Faculty Board, in another tertiary institution; or
(iii) have such other qualifications and experience as may be approved by the Senate on the recommcndation of the FaculL y Board or otherwise as may be specified in the Schedule; and
(b) have satisfied such other requirements as may be specified in the Schedule.
(2) Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule, applications for admission to candidature shall be considered by the Faculty Board which may approve or reject any application.
(3) An applicant shall not be admitted to candidature unless adequate supervision and facilities are available. Whether these are available shall be determined by the Faculty Board unless the Schedule otherwise providcs.
88
MASTERS DEGREE REGULATIONS
4. To qualify for admission to adegreeofMasteracandidate shall enrol and satisfy the requirements of these Regulations including the Schedule.
S. The programme shall be carried out:-
(a) under the guidance of a supervisor or supervisors either appointed by the Faculty Board or as otherwise prescribed in the Schedule; or
(b) as the Faculty Board may otherwise detennme.
6. Upon request by acandidate the Faculty Board may grant leave of absence from the course. Such leave shall not be taken into account in calculating the period for the programme prescribed in the Schedule.
7. (l) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by infonning the Secrctary to the University in writing and such withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.
(2) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty.
The relevant date shall be:
(a) in case of a subject offered only in the first semester, the Monday of the ninth week of the first semester;
(b) in case of a subject offered only in the second semester, the Monday of the ninth week of second semester;
(c) in case of any other subject, the Monday of the third week of second semester.
8. (1) If the Faculty Board is of the opinion that the candidate is not making satisfactory progress towards the degree then it may terminate the candidature or place such conditions on its continuation as it deems fit.
(2) For the purpose of assessing a candidate's progress, the Faculty Board may require any candidate to submit a report or reports on their progress.
(3) A candidate against whom adecision of the Faculty Board has been made under Regulation 8(1) of these Regulations may request that the Faculty Board cause the case to bereviewed. Such request shall be made tothe Dean of the Faculty within sevendays from the date of posting to the candidate the advice of the Faculty Board's decision or such further period as the Dean may accept.
(4) A candidate may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor against any decision made following the review under Regulation 8(3) of these Regulations.
9. In exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the Senate, on the recommendation of the Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these RegUlations.
Part II - Examination and Results 10. The Examination Regulations approved from time to time by the Council shall apply to all examinations with respect to a degree of Master with the exception of the examination of a thesis which shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of Regulations 12 to 16 inclusive of these Regulations.
SECfION SIX
11. The Faculty Board shall consider the results in subjects, the reports of examiners and any otherrecommendations prescribed in the Schedule and shall decide:
(a) to recommend to the Council that the candidate be admitted to the degree; or
(b) in a case where a thesis has been submitted, to permit the candidate to resubmit an amended thesis within twelve fnonths of the date on which the candidate is advised of the result of the first examination or within such longer period of time as the Faculty Board may prescribe; or
(c) to require the candidate to undertake such further oral, written or practical examinations as the Faculty Board may prescribe; or
(d) not to recommend that the candidate be admitted to the degree, in which case the candidature shall be terminated.
Part III - Provisions Relating to Theses 12. (l)The subject of a thesis shall be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department in which the candidate is carrying out the research for the thesis.
(2) The thesis shall not contain as its main content any work or material which has previously been submitted by the candidate for a degree in any tertiary institution unless the Faculty Board otherwise pennits.
13.The candidate shall give to the Secretary to the University three months' written notice of the date the candidate expects to submit a thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by any prescribed fee:
14.(1) The candidate shall comply with the following provisions concerning the presentation of a thesis:
(a) the thesis shall contain anabstract of approximately 200 words describing its content;
(b) the thesis shall be typed and bound in a mannerprescribed by the University;
(c) three copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with:
(i) a certificate signed by the candidate that the main content of the thesis has not been submitted by the candidate for a degree of any other tertiary institution; and
(ii) a certificate signed by the supeIVisor indicating whether the candidate has completed the programme and whether the thesis is of sufficient academic merit to warrant examination; and
(iii) if the candidate so desires, any documents or published work of the candidate whether bearing on the subject of the thesis or not.
(2) The Faculty Board shall determine the course of action to be taken should the certificate of the supervisor indicate that in the opinion of the supervisor the thesis is not of sufficient academic merit to warrant examination.
• at present there is no fee payable
MASTERS DEGREE REGULATIONS
15. The University shall beentitled to retain the submitted copies of the thesis, accompanying documents and published work. The University shall be free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed and, subject to the proviSions of the Copyright Act, 1968(Com), may issue it in whole or any part in photocopy or microfilm or other copying medium.
16.(1) For each candidate two examiners, at least one of whom shall be an external examiner (being a person who is not a member of the staff of the University) shall be appointed either by the Faculty Board or otherwise as prescribed in the Schedule.
(2) If the examiners' reports are such that the Faculty Board is unable to make any decision pursuant to Regulation 11 of these Regulations, a third examiner shall be appointed either by the Faculty Board or otherwise as prescribed in the Schedule.
SCHEDULE 8 - MASTER OF MATHEMATICS
1. The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall be responsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Mathematics.
2. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:
(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor of the University of Newcastle with honours in the area of studyin which the applicant proposes tocarry out research orto an Honours degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another University; or
(b) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another tertiary institution and have completed such work and sat for such examinations as the Faculty Board may have detenninedand have achievedastandard at least equivalent to that required for admission to a degree of Bachelor with second class honours in an appropriate subject; or
(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such academic or professional qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.
3. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a programme consisting of:
(a) such examinations and other such work as may be described by the Faculty Board; and
(b) a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation or design.
4. The programme shall be completed in not less than two years except that, in the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for a degree of Bachelor with Honours or for a qualification deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent or who has had previous research experience, the Faculty Board may reduce this period by up to one year.
S. A part-time candidate shall, except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, which shall begivenonlyin special circumstances:
(a) conduct the major proportion of the research or design work in the University; and
(b) take partin research seminars within the Department in which the the programme is being carried oul.
6. Any third examiner shall be an cxternal examiner . 89
SECfION SIX
SCHEDULE 9 - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY (CLINICAL)
1.(1 ) The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall be responsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Psychology(Clinical).
(2) Unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires,
"the Board" means the Board of Studies in Psychology.
2. On the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Psychology. the Board shall appoint a coursecontroller who shall recommend to the Board the nature and extent of the programmes to be prescribed and shall be responsible for the collation of all written work submitted by candidates in pursuing those programmes.
3. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:
(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor with Honours in Psychology of the University of Newcastle orto an Honours degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another university; or
(b) on the recommendation of the Board, have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle orto a degree, approved f orlhis purpose by the Faculty Board, of another university, provided that the course completed for that degree by the applicant included a major sequence in Psychology.
4.(1) The Board shall consider each application for admission to candidature and shall make a decision thereon.
(2) Before approving an admission to candidature under Section 3(b) of this schedule the Board may require an applicant to complete such work and pass such examinations at honours level as may be prescribed by the Board.
(3) Before an application for admission to candidature is approved, the Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and facilities are available.
(4) In considering an application, the Board sha1l take account of the applicant's academic qualifications and experience, the report of an interview with the applicant and any other selection procedures applied to the applicant as determined by the Board. The inteIView and selection procedures shall be conducted by a Selection Committee approved by the Board.
5.(1) To qualify for admission to the degree the candidate shall:
(a) attend such lectures, seminars and tutorials and complete to the satisfaction of the Board such written and practical work and examinations as may be prescribed by the Board; and
(b) submit a thesis embodying the results of an empirical inves· tigation.
(2) The programme shall be completed in not less than two years and, except with the permission of the Faculty Board given on the recommendation of the Board, not more than six years.
6.(1) Examiners shall be appointed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Board.
90
MASTERS DEGREE REGULATIONS
(2) One examiner appointed pursuant to Regulation 16(1) of these Regulations shall be an internal examiner being a member of the staff of the University.
7. Before a decision is made under Regulation 11 of these Regulations the Board shall consider:
(1) the examiners' report on the thesis; and
(2) areport of the internal examiner made in consultation with the course controller on the candidate's perfonnance in the work prescribed under section 5(1) of this Schedule;
and shall submit these to the Faculty Board together with its recommendation. The Faculty Board shall make its decision in the light of these reports and on the recommendation of the BOard.
SCHEDULE 10 - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY (EDUCATIONAL)
1.(1) The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall beresponsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Psychology(Educational).
(2)Unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires,
"the Board" means the Board of Studies in Psychology.
2. On the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Psychology, the Board shall appoint acoursecontrollerwho shall recommend to the Board the nature and extent of the programmes to be prescribed and shall be responsible for the collation of all written work submitted by candidates in pursuing those programmes.
3. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:
(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor of the University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another university and have satisfactorily completed four 300 level Psychology subjects orreached a standard in Psychology deemed by the Board to be equivalent; and
b) have satisfied all the requirements for the award of the Diploma in Education of the University of Newcastle or another teaching qualification approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; and
(c) have at least two years teaching or other relevant practical experience approved by the Board.
4.(1) The Board shall consider each application for admission to candidature and shall make a decision thereon.
(2) Before an application for admission to candidature is approved. the Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and facilities are available.
(3) In considering an application, the Board shall take account of the applicant's academic qualifications and experience, and also the report of an interview with the applicant and any othel selection procedures applied to the applicant as determined by the Board, which shall be conducted by a Selection Committee approved by the Board.
5.(1) To qualify for admission to the degree the candidate shall:
SECTION SIX
(a) attend such lectures, seminars and tutorials, and complete to the satisfaction of the Board such written and practical work and examinations as may be prescribed by the Board; and
(b) submit a thesis embodying the results of an empirical investigation.
(2) The programme shall be completed in not less than two years and, except with the pennission of the Faculty Board given on the recommendalion of the Board, not more than six years.
6.(1) Examiners shall be appointed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Board.
(2) One examiner appointed pursuant to Regulation 16(1) of these Regulations shall be an internal examiner being a member of the staff of the University.
7. Before a decision is made under Regulation 11 of these Regulations the Board shall consider:
(a) the examiners' reports on the thesis; and
(b) areportofthe internal examiner made in consultation with the course controller on the candidate's performance in the work prescribed under section 5(1) of this Schedule;
and shall submit these to the Faculty Board together with its recommendation. The Faculty Board shall make its decision in theJight of these reports and on the recommendalionofthe Board.
SCHEDULE I I - MASTER OF SCIENCE
1. A candidate for the degree of Master of Science may be enrolled in either the Faculty of Engineering or the Faculty of Science and Mathematics. The Faculty in which the candidate is enrolled shall be responsible for the programme.
2.(1) To be eligible for admission to candidature in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics an applicant shall:
(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours Qass I or Class II of the University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of this or any other university; or
(b) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science of the University ofN ewcastle or other approved university and have completed such work and passed such examinations as the Faculty Board may have determined and have achieved a standard at least equivalent to that required for admission to a degree of Bachelor with second class Honours in an appropriate subject; or
(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty BoardontherecommendationoftheHeadoftheDepartment in which the applicant proposes tocarry out the programme.
(2) To be eligible for admission to candidature in the Faculty of Engineering an applicant shall:
(a) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree with Honours in the University of Newcastle or
MASTERS DEGREE REGULATIONS
other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board in the area in which the applicant proposes to carry out research; or
(b) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree in the University of Newcastle or other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board and have completed to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board such workand examinations asdetermined by the Faculty Board; or
(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation oftheI-leadoftheDepartment in which the candidate proposes tocarry out the programme.
3. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a programme consisting of:
(a) such work and examinations as may be prescribed by the Faculty Board; and
(b) a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation or design.
4. The programme shall be completed:
(a) in not less than two academic years except that, in the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for a degree of Bachelor with Honours or a qualification deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent or who has had previous research experience, the Faculty Board may reduce this period to not less than one academic year; and
(b) except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, in not more than five years.
5.(1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, which shall be given only in special circumstances, a part-time candidate enrolled in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall:
(a) conduct the major proportion of the research or design work in the University; and
b) take part in research seminars within the Department in which the programme is being carried out.
(2) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidale enrolled in the Faculty of Engineering shall take part in the research seminars within the Department in which the programme is being carried oul.
SCHEDULE \3 - MASTER OF SCIENTIFIC STUDIES
1. The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall be responsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Scientific Studies.
2. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:
(a) (i) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree with Honours in the University of Newcastle or other tertiary institution approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; or
91
SECfION SIX
(ii) have satisfied the requirements for Ute Diploma in Science or Equivalent Honours in the University of Newcastle, or an equivalent qualification in another tertiary institution; or
(iii) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved bythePaculty Board; and
(b) satisfy the Faculty Board that the candidate is academically competent to undertake the proposed programme.
3. (1) To qualify for admission to the degree the candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a programme prescribed by the Dean on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments offering the units comprising the programme.
(2) The programme shan consist of 12 units of work of which not less than 200r more than 4 shall comprise the investigation of and report on a project specified by the Dean.
(3) Units of work, other than those comprising the project, shall require attendance at lectures, seminars and tutorials and the completion to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board of such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine.
4. Except with the permission oftheFaculty Board the programme shall becompleted in not less than one year and not more than four years.
92
MASTERS DEGREE REGULATIONS
,
SECTION SEVEN
POSTGRADUA1E DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Notes on Subject and Topic Descriptions The subject and topic outlines and reading lists which follow are set out in a standard fonnat to facilitate easy reference. An explanation is given below of some of the technical terms used in this Handbook.
Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed before acandidate enrols in a particular subject. The only prerequisites noted for topics are any topics or subjects which must be taken before emolling in the particular topic. To eruol in any subject which the topic may be part of, the prerequisites for that subject must still be satisfied.
Wherea prerequisite is marked as advisory ,lectures will be given on the assumption that the subject or topic has been completed as indicated.
Corequisites for subjects or topics are those which the candidate must pass before enrolment or be taking concurrently.
Examination. Under examination regUlations "examination" includes mid· year examinations, assignments, tests or any other work by which the final grade of a candidate in a subject is assessed. Some attempt has been made to indicate for each subject how assessment is determined. See particularly the general statement in the Department of Mathematics section headed "Progressive Assessment" referring to Mathematics subjects.
Texts are essential books recommended for purchase.
References are books relevant to the subject or topic which, however. need not be purchased.
mOIAO!} mOIA02}
HONOURS IN BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
24cp+ 24cp
Prerequisites Completion of Ordinary Degree requirements and permission of the Head of the Department.
ContenJ
Carry out a research project and complete a thesis. essay, viva and two seminars.
CHEM40!} HONOURS IN CHEMISTRY CHEM402}
24cp+ 24cp
Prerequisites: Completion of Ordinary Degree requirements and permission of the Head of Department. For 1990. atleast acredit grade in either Chemistry InA or llIB will be the nonnal expectation. After 1990 an average credit grade in at least four 300 level Chemistry subjects will berequired. Students intending to undertake the Honours programme should notify the Head of Department of their intention by 1 October in their final undergraduate year and confinn this as soonas final examination resulLs are known.
Content
The Honours programme extends over two semesters orils parttime equivalent and consists of:
i) a course of advanced lectures (approximately 60 hours)
ii) a reading list in the main area of interest
iii) a supervised research project. the results of which are embodied in a thesis and presented as a seminar
Examination Half each of the lecture course and the reading list will be examined at the end of semester one and the remainder at the cnd of the second semester. The thesis will be assessed by a
93
SECTION SEVEN
committee of three (one of whom shall be the project supervisor) appointed by the Department. Part·time subjects will have their assessment spread accordingly over two academic years.
For grading purposes equal weighting will be given to the three components of the programme.
GE0L401) HONOURS IN GEOLOGY GE0L402)
24cp+ 24cp
Prerequisiles 1990 Geology IlIA, completion of ordinary degree requirements and permission of the Head of the Department.
Hours To be advised
Examination
(i) a viva voce examination
(ti) research work carried out and its presentation in a thesis
(iii) a reading thesis
(iv) such other work, e.g. seminars, assignments, earlier academic record, which may be considered relevant
Content
Part A
Lecture·tutorial work with directed reading in the following fields of geology: mineralogy and crystallography, geochemistry; igneous petrology; metamorphic petrology; coal petrology; sedimentology; stratigraphy, palaeontology; structural geology; economic geology; engineering geology.
Not all fields will be available every year.
PartB
A reading thesis and a research project, the results of which are to be embodied in a thesis.
GEOL401) HONOURS IN GEOLOGY 24cp+ MATH401) AND MATHEMATICS 24cp
Prerequisites 1990 Geology IlIA or Geology lIIC and Mathematics IlIA and such additional work as is required for combined honours students by the Department of Mathematics. A student desiring admission to this subject must apply in writing to the Dean of the Faculty before 7 December of the preceding year.
Hours To be advised
Content
Atleastfourtopics (24 credit points) chosen from those available to honours students in Mathematics for the current year together with work equal to 24 credit points offered by the Department of Geology for that year. GEOL401 will also include a major thesis which embodies the results of a field research project involving the application of mathematical studies to a particular geological problem. Other work e.g seminars and assignments may be required by either Department.
94
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
MATH401)HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS MATH402)
24cp+ 24cp
Prerequisites 1990 Mathematics rnA and at least one of Mathematics lIm, Computer Science rnA or Statistics rn and additional work as prescribed by the Heads of the Departments concerned.
Hours At least 8 lecture hours per week over one full·time year or 4 lecture hours per week over two part·time years.
Examination At least eight 2 hour final papers, and a study under direction of a special topic using relevant published material and presented in written fonn. Work on this thesis normally starts early in February.
Content
A selection of at least eight Mathematics 400 level topics. The topics offered may be from any branch of Mathematics including Pure Mathematics, Applied Mathematics, Statistics, Computer Science and Operations Research as exemplified in the publicalion Mathematical Reviews. Summaries of some topics are given later in this section of the Handbook, but the Department should be consulted for further details, including the current list of suitable topics from other Departments.
Students desiring admission to this subject should apply in writing to the Head of the Department before 20 Decemberofthe preceding year.
400 LEVEL MA THEMA TICS TOPICS
Note: A meeting will be held on the first Tuesday of the first semester in Room V107 at 1.00 pm to detennine both the timetable for these topics and which topics are to be offered for the year.
Other topics than those listed here will be offered from time to time, and even at short notice by visitors to the Department. Intending students should consult the Department early in the year regarding topics.
ASTROPHYSICAL APPLICATIONS OF MAGNETOHYDRODYNAMICS
Prerequisites Topics CO and PD
Hours About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
The nonnal state of matter in the universe is that of a plasma, or ionized gas, penneated by magnetic fields. Moreover, these fields (unlike that of the earth) may be dominant, or at least significant, in controlling the structure of the region. The aim of this course is to investigate the effects of astrophYSical magnetic fields, ranging from 10·6 gauss in the galaxy to 1012 gauss in a neutron star.
References
Chandrasekhar, S. Hydrodynamic and Hydromagnetic Stability (Oxford, 1961)
SEcrlON SEVEN
Cowling, T.G. Magnetohydrodynamics (lnterscience, 1957)
De Jong, T. & Maeder, A.(ed) Star Fonnation (Reidel, 1977)
Meste!, L. Effects oj Magnetic Fields (Mem Sc Roy Sc ~ege (6) 8 791975)
Moffatt, H.K. Magnetic Field Generation in Electrically Conducting Fluids (Cambridge U.P., 1978)
Spiegel, E.A. & Zahn, LP.(eds) Problems of Stellar Convection (Springer, 1976)
BANACH ALGEBRA
Corequisites Topic W
Hours About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
A Banach Algebra is a mathematical structure where the two main strands of pure mathematical study -the topological and the algebraic - are united in fruitful contact. The course will coverthe following subject matter. Nonned algebras; regular and singular elements; the spectrum of an element and its properties; the Gelfand·Mazur theorem; topological divisors of zero; the spectral radius and spectral mapping theorem for polynomials; ideals and maximal ideals. Commutative Banach algebras; the Gelfand theory and the Gelfand representation theorem. Weak topologies, the Banach·Alaoglu theorem, the Gelfand topology. Involutions in Banach algebras; hermitian involutions; the Gelfand·Naimark representation theorem for commutive B'" algebras. Numerical range of an element in a nonned algebra; relation of the numerical range to the spectrum; B'" algebras are symmetric, discussion of the Gelfand·Naimark representation theorem for B '" algebras. Applications of Banach a1gebra theory.
Text
Ze!azko, W. Banach Algebras (Elsevier, 1973)
References
Bachman, G. & Narici, L. Functional Analysis (Academic. 1966)
Bonsall, F.F. & Duncan, J. Complete Normed Algebras (Springer, 1973)
Bonsall, F.F. & Duncan, J. Numerical Ranges oj Operators on Normed Spaces and Elements oJNormedAlgebras (Cambridge, 1970)
Naimark, M.A. Nonned Rings (Noordhoff, 1959)
Rickart. C.E. GeneraITheoryofBanachAlgebras(VanNostrand,I960)
Rudin, W. Functional Analysis (McGraw·Hill, 1973)
POSTGRADUA 1E sUBmcr DESCRIPTIONS
Simmons, G.F. Introduction to TopoJogyandModernAnalysis(McGraw. Hill,1963)
Wilansky, A. Functional Analysis (Blaisdell, 1964)
CONYEX ANALYSIS
Corequisites Topic W
Hours About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Convexity has become an increasingly important concept in analysis: much of current research in functional analysis concerns generalising to convex functions, properties previously studied for the norm; much of interest in convexity has arisen from areas of applied mathematics related to fixed point theory and optimisation problems. We begin with a study of convex sets and functions defined on linear spaces: gauges of convex sets, separation properties. We then study topology on linear spaces generated by convex sets: metrisability, nonnability and f"mite dimensional cases. We examine continuity and separation for locally convex spaces, continuity for convexity properties and Banach·Alaoglu theorem. We study extreme points of convex sets, the Krein·Milman theorem. We give particular attention to the study of differentiation of convex functions on nonnedlinear spaces: Gateaux and Frechet derivative, Mazur's and Asplund's theorems.
Text
Giles, J.R. Convex Analysis withAppJication in the Differentiation of Convex Functions (Pitman, 1982)
References
Barbu, V. & Precupanu, T. Convexity and Optimization in Banach Spaces (Sijthoff & Noordhoff,1978)
Clarke, F.H. Optimization and non-smooth analysis (Wiley, 1983)
Day,M.M. Normed Linear Spaces (Springer, 1973)
Diestel, J. Geometry of Banach Spaces· Selected Topics (Springer, 1975)
Ekeland, I. & Ternan, R. ConvexAnalysisandVariationalProbJems(NorthHoIland, 1976)
Giles, J.R. Analysis oj Normed Linear Spaces (University of Newcastle, 1978)
Holmes, R.B. Geometric Functional Analysis and its Applications (Springer, 1975)
Roberts, A.W. & Varberg, D.E. Convex Functions (Academic, 1970)
95
SECfION SEVEN
Rockafeller, R T. Convex Analysis (Princeton, 1970)
Rudin, W. Functional Analysis (McGraw~Hill, 1973)
Valentine, F.A. Convex Sets (McGraw~Hill, 1964)
Wilansky,A. Functional Analysis (Blaisdell, 1964)
FLVID STATISTICAL MECHANICS
HOUTS About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Cluster-diagrammatic expansions-low density-solutions; integrodifferential equations (BGY, HNC, PY)-high density solutions; quantum liquids -Wu-Feenburg fermion extension; numerical solution of integral equations; phase transitionsdiagrammatic approach; critical phenomena; the liquid surface; liquid metals; liquid crystals; molecular dynamics and Monte Carlo computer simulation; irreversibility; transport phenomena. Polymeric systems.
Text
Croxton, C.A. Introduction to Liquid State Physics (Wiley, 1975)
References
Croxton, C.A. Liquid State Physics -AS talistical M echanicall ntroduction (Cambridge V.P., 1974)
FOVNDATIONS OF MODERN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY
Prerequisite Topic CO
HOUTS About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
This topic will introduce basic concepts of the local theory of differentiable manifolds. Vector fields, differential forms, and their mapping. Frobenius' theorem. Fundamental properties of Lie groups and Lie algebras. General linear group. PrinCiple and associated fibre bundles. Connections. Bundle of linear frames, affine connections. Curvature and torsion. Metric, geodesics. Riemannian manifolds.
References
Auslander, L. Differential Geometry (Harper & Row, 1967)
Chevalley, C. Theory of Lie Groups Vol. 1 (Princeton, 1946)
Kobayashi, S. & Nomizu, K.
96
F ountiationsofDifferential Geometry Vol. 1 (Interscience, 1963)
POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
HISTORY OF ANALYSIS TO AROVND 1900
HOUTS About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
A course of 26 lectures on the history of mathematics with emphasis on analysis. Other branches of mathematics will be referred to for putting the analysis into context. Where feasible, use will be made of original material, in translation. The course will be assessed by essays and a final 2 hour examination.
Topics to be covered include: pre-Greek concepts of exactness and approximation; Greek concepts of continuity, irrationality, infmity, infinitesimal, magnitude, ratio, proportion and their treatment in Elements V, XII and the works of Archimedes; developments of number systems and theirequi valents; scholastic mathematics; virtual motion; Renaissance quadrature/cubature by infinitesimals and by "geometry"; Cartesian geometry; 17th and 18th century calculus; rigorization of analysis in the 19th century with stress on the developments of number systems, continuity, function concept, differentiability, integrability.
References Lists will be presented during the course.
Students interested in this or other topics on aspects of the History of Mathematics should approach the lecturer concerned as soon as possible.
LINEAR OPERATORS
Prerequisites Topics V & W
HOUTS About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
The theory of linear operators on Hilbert and Banach spaces is an important theory particularly because of its applications to many areas of pure and applied science. We consider further aspects of normed linear space theory, the algebra of continuous linear operators on a normed linear space, the spectrum and numerical range of a continuous linear operator, and conjugate operators. We discuss the theory of compact linear operators and the RieszSchauder Theory for such operators. The course concentrates on spectral theory for different types of operator on Hilbert space: compact normal, self-adjoint and normal operators.
References
Bachman, G. & Narici, L. Functional Analysis (paperback Academic, 1966)
Brown, A. & Page, A. Elements of Functional Analysis (Van Nostrand, 1970)
Dunford, N. & Schwarts, J. Linear Operators (lnterscience, 1958)
Halmos, H. A J/ ilbert space Problem Book (VanNostrand, 1967)
Kreysig, E. Introduction to Functional Analysis with Applications (Wiley, 1978)
SECTION SEVEN
Rudin, W. Functional Analysis (McGraw-Hill, 1973)
Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. Introduction to Functional Analysis (Wiley,. 1980)
MATHEMATICAL PHYSIOLOGY
Hours About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Physiology; the study of how the body works based on the knowledge of how it is constructed - essentially dates from early in the seventeenth century when the English physician Harvey showed that blood circulates constantly through the body. The intrusion of engineering into this field is well known through the wide publicity given to (for example) heart by-pass and kidney dialysis machines, cardiac assist pacemakers, and prosthetic devices such as hip and knee joints; the obviously beneficial union has led to the establishment of Bioengineering Departments within universities and hospitals. Perhaps the earliest demonstration of mathematics', useful application in (some areas of) physiology is the mid-nineteenth century derivation by Hagen, from the basic equations of continuum motion, of Poiseuille's empirical formula for flow through narrow straight tubes; detailed models of the cardiovascular circulatory system have recently been developed, Mathematical models have also been formulated for actions such as coughing, micturition and walking, as well as for the more vital processes involved in gas exchange in the lungs, mass transport between lungs and blood and blood and tissue, metabolic exchanges within tissues, enzyme kinetics, signal conduction along nerve fibres, sperm transport in the cervix. Indeed, mathematical engineering might now be said to be part of the conspiracy to produce super humans (e.g. see "Fast RunningTracks"in Dec. 1978 issue of Scientific American).
This course will examine in some detail a few of the previously mentioned mathematical models; relevant physiological material will be introduced as required.
References
Bergel, D.H. (ed) Cardiovascular Fluid Dynamics Vols I & II (Academic, 1972)
Caro, e.G., Pedley, T.J. The Mechanics of the Circulation (Oxford, 1978)
Christensen, H.N. Biological Transport (Benjamin, 1975)
Fung, Y.C. Biodynamics: Circulation (Springer, 1984)
Fung, Y.C. Biomechanics: Mechanical Properties of Living Tissues (Springer, 1981)
Fung, Y.C., Perrone, N. & Amiker, M. (eds) Biomechanics: Its Foundations and Objectives (Prentice· HaIl,I972)
Transport Phenomena atul Living Systems (Wiley,1974)
POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Margaria, R. Biomechanics atul Energetics of Muscular Eurcise (Clarendon, 1976)
Pedley, T.J. The Fluid Mechanics of Large Blood Vessels (Cambridge V.P., 1980)
West, J.B. (ed) BioengineeringAspectsoftheLung(MarcelDekker, 1977)
NONLINEAR OSCILLATIONS
Prerequisite Topic P
HOUTS About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Conlent
Physical problems often give rise to ordinary differential equations which have oscillatory solutions. This course will be concerned with the existence and stability of periodic solutions of such differential equations, and will coverthe following subjects; twodimensional autonomous systems, limit sets, and the PoincareBendixson theorem. Brouwer's fixed point theorem and its usein finding periodic solutions. Non-critical linear systems and their perturbations. The method of averaging. Frequency locking, jump phenomenon, and subharmonics. Bifurcation of periodic solutions. Attention will be paid to applications throughout the course.
References
Hale, J.K. Ordinary Differential Equations (Wiley, 1969)
Hirsch, M.W. & Smale, S Differenlial Equations, Dynamical Systems and Linear Algebra (Academic, 1974)
Marsden, 1.E. & McCracken, M. The H opfB ijurcalionatul its Applications (Springer, 1976)
Nayfeh, AH. & Mook, D.T. Nonlinear Oscillations (Wiley, 1979)
Stoker, J.J. Nonlinear Vibrations (Wiley, 1950)
PERTVRBA nON THEORY
Prerequisites Topics CO, P or MATH 201/203/304
Hours About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Regularperturbation methods, including parameter and coordinate perturbations. A discussion of the sources of nonuniformity in perturbation expansions. The method of strained coordinates and the methods of matched and composite asymptotic expansions. The method of multiple scales.
References Bender, C.M. & Orszag, S.A.
Advanced Mathematical Methods for Engineers (McGraw-Hill, 1978)
Scienlists and
97
SECf10N SEVEN
Cole,J.D. Perturbation Methods in Applied Math2matics (Blaisdell, (968)
Nayfeh, A.H. lnzroduclion 10 Perturbation Techniques (Wiley. 1981)
Nayfeh, A.H. Perturbation Methods (Wiley, 1973)
Van Dyke,M. Perturbation Methods in Fluid Mechanics (Parabolic, 1975)
QUANTUM MECHANICS
Hours About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
ConJenl
Operators; Schrodingerequation; one dimensional motion; parity; harmonic oscillator; angular momentum; central potential; eigenfunction; spin and statistics; Rutherford scattering; scattering theory phase shift analysis; nucleon-nucleon interaction; spindependent interaction; operators and stale vectors; Schrodinger equations of motion; Heisenberg equation of motion. Quantum molecular orbitals; hybridization; LeAD theory; MO theory.
Texts
Croxton, C.A. Introductory Eigenphysics (Wiley. 1974)
Matthews, P,T. IntroductionloQuantumMechanics(McGraw-Hill.1968)
RADICAl.'i & ANNIHILATORS
Prerequisite Topic T or X
Hours About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
This topic will briefly outline the classical theory of finite dimensional algebras and the emergence of the concepts of radical, idempotence, ring, chain conditions, etc. Hopefully thus set in perspective, the next part will deal with the Artin-HopkinsJacobson ring theory and the significance of other radicals when finiteness conditions are dropped. The relations between various radicals, noetherian rings, left and right annihilators and the Goldie-Small theorems will end the topic
References
Cohn,P. Algebra Vol. 2 (Wiley, 1977)
Divinsky. N. RingsandRadicais (Allen & Vnwin, 1964)
Herstein, I.N. Non-commutative Rings (Wiley, 1968)
Kaplansky,1. Fields and Rings (Chicago V.P., 1969)
98
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
McCoy,N. The Theory of Rings (McMillan, 1965)
SYMMETRY
Prerequisites Some knowledge of Linear Algebra
Hours About 27 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
This course studies various aspects of symmetry. Matters discussed may include: invariance of lattices, crystals and associated functions and equations; permutation groups; fmite geometries; regular and strongly-regular graphs; designs; tactical configurations, "classical" simple groups, Matrix groups, representations, characters.
References
Biggs,N. Finite Groups of AuJomorphisms (Cambridge V.P., 1971)
Carmichael, R.D_ Groups of Finite Order (Dover reprint, 1984)
Harris, D.C. & Bertolucci, M.D. Symmetry and Spectroscopy (Oxford, 1978)
Rosen. J. Symmetry Discovered (Cambridge, 1975)
Shubnikov, A.V. & Koptsik, V.A. Symmetry in Science and Art (Plenum, 1974)
Weyl,H. Symmetry (Princeton, 1973)
White.A.T. Graphs. Groups and Surfaces (North-Holland, 1973)
VISCOUS FLOW THEORY
Prerequisite Topic Q or MATH 306
Hours About 1:7 lecture hours
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
Basic equations. Some exact solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations. Approximate solutions: theory of very slow motion, boundary layer theory, etc.
References
Batchelor, G.K. An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics (Cambridge V.P., 1967)
Landau, L.D. & Lifshitz, E.M. Fluid Mechanics (pergamon, 1959)
Langlois, W.E. Slow Viscous Flow (Macmillan, 1964)
Pai, S.I. Viscous Flow Theory VoU (VanNostrand, 1956)
Rosenhead, 1. (ed.) lAminar Boundary Layers (Oxford U.P, 1963)
SECfrON SEVEN
Schlichting. H. Boundary Layer Theory (McGraw-Hill, 1968)
Teman,R. Nallier-Stolces Equations -Theory andNumericalAnalysis (North Holland, 1976)
MATH401} HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS ECON401} AND ECONOMICS
24"1>+ 24cp
Prerequisites 1990 Mathematics nIA and Economics mc and such additional work as is required for combined honours students by the Departments of Mathematics and/or Statistics.
Hours To be advised. A project of mathematical and economic significance jointly supervised.
Examination Assessment will be in the appropriate Mathematics and Economics topics. In addition, the project will be evaluated by independent examiners.
Content
The student shall complete not fewer than four 400 level Mathematics topics (24 credit points) and topics equivalent to 24 credit points from the 400 level Economics list chosen appropriately and approved jointly by the Heads of the Departments concerned.
MATH401} HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS PHYS401} AND PHYSICS
24cp+ 24cp
Prerequisites 1990 Physics nIA and Mathematics rnA
Prerequisites 1991 Atleast four 300 level Mathematics subjects and Physics 301 with any other four Physics 300 level subjects
Hours To be advised and, in addition, a research project within the Department of Physics and/or Mathematics which may be jointly supervised.
Examination Assessment will be in the appropriate Physics 400 level and Mathematics 400 level topics selected. In addition, the research project will be assessed on the basis of a wriuen report and a seminar on the project.
Content
A combination of Mathematics 400 and Physics 400 level topics as approved by the Head of each Department, and either a Mathematics or Physics project as approved.
MATH401} HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS PSYC401} AND PSYCHOLOGY
24cp+ 24cp
Prerequisites 1990 Mathematics rnA and Psychology me Hours To be advised.
Examination To be advised.
Content
To be advised. At least four 400 level Mathematics topiCS (24 credit points) togetherwith aselection of seminars from PSY C40l and/or PSYC402 which may include mathematical applications in Psychology.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
PHYS40I} HONOURS IN PHYSICS PHYS402}
24cp;. 24cp
Prerequisites 1990 Physics IDA.Attention is drawn to degree requirements for Honours.
Prerequisites 1991 PHYS30l plus any other three PHYS300 subjeccs.It is expected that the level 300 Physics subjects will have been passed at Credit level or better.
Hours PHYS40l and 402 together comprise 115 hours of lectures plus a project.
Examination As required
Content
Physics 401 and 402 are intended to give students an advanced understanding of the fundamentals of modem physics appropriate for an Honours graduate in the discipline as well as an exposure to the current interests of the Department viz. solid stale and surface physics. space plasma physics. radar meteor physics, electromagneticsignalpropagalion.andaspectsofappliedphysics.
In 1990. these aims will be achieved by offering three compulsory core topics: Quantum Mechanics, Theoretical Solid State Physics and Plasma Physics.Optional topics include Relativity, Applied Nuclear Physics, Surface Physics, Atomic Collisions in Solids, Laser Physics, Particle Detection. Solar Terrestrial Physics, and Fourier Transforms. Additional topics may be added depending on visitors to the Department and all topics need not necessarily be offered in anyone year.
Texts As required.
PSYC401} HONOURS IN PSYCHOLOGY PSYC402}
PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS)
24cp;. 24cp
24cp
Prerequisites 1990 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of the BA (psych) or BSc (Psych), including the following subjects: Psychology I, Psychology IIA, Psychology TID, and Psychology IDA. Candidates must EITHER have a credit or above in Psychology InA OR in addition have a credit or above in Psychology IDB.
Prerequisites 1991 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych), including the following subjects: Psychology I. Psychology ITA. Psychology DB, PSYClOl, PSYClO2, PSYCl03 and PSYCl04. Candidates must have a credit or above in BOTH PSYC301 AND PSYC302 as well as two additional credits in level 300 Psychology subjects. PSYCl05, PSYCl06, PSYC307, and PSYCl08 are not compulsory but may be used to obtain the necessary credits.
Hours Twelve hours per week for the full year
Examination To be advised
Content
PSYC40l comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC402 as well; part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402 in the second. PSYC401 consists of five seminar
99
SECfION SEVEN
series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in psychology, a choice of two units in biological or physiological psychology, and a choice of two units in applied or social psychology. Each unit will include seminars at which attendance and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. One seminar may be replaced with a practical placement and associated essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403.
Texts To be advised
References To be advised
PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 24cp (THESIS)
Prerequisites 1990 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of a BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych), including the following subjects: Psychology I, Psychology IlA, Psychology lIB, and Psychology IlIA. Candidates must EITHER have a credit or above in Psychology IlIA OR in addition havea credit or above in Psychology nIB.
Prerequisites 1991 A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of a BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych) including the following subjects. Psychology I, Psychology IIA, Psychology lIB, PSYC301, PSYC 302, PSYC303 and PSYC304. Candidates must have acredit or above in BOTH PSYeJOI and PSYC302 as well as two additional credits in level 300 Psychology subjects. PSYC305, PSYC306, PSYC307, and PSYC308 are not compulsory but may be used to obtain the necessary credits.
Corequisite PSYC401
Hours Twelve hours per week for the full year
Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by the supeIVisorand by another member, or members of the Department.
Content
PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC401 as well; part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402 in the second. PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analysis, and reporting of a pieee of original empirical research. The thesis is a formal presentation of this research and must be in APA format. There is a limit of fifty pages. Each student will be supervised by a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. Involvement with external agencies must be through official departmental channels.
Texts To be advised
References To be advised
GEOG40l} Honours in GEOGRAPHY GEOG402)
Prerequisite 1990 Geography rnA or IIIB
24cp+ 24cp
Prerequisites1991 GEOOI01 &GEOOI02pluseitherGEOG201 &GEOO301 orGEOG202&GEOO302Toqualifyforadmission
100
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
to the Honours Degree, a student must nonnally have completed sufficient training in geographical methods (i.e. GEOG201 and GEOG30\ for Physical Geography; GEOG202 and GEOG302 forHumanGeography),andhavecompletedaMajorinGeography that includes GEOGIOI, GEOGI02, 18 credit points from level 200 courses and 24 credit points from level 300 courses. To proceed to Honours in Geography a student should have obtained an average of credit in the 300 level courses taken for the major plus at least 12 other points at credit level in their university courses. The student must also satisfy the Head of the Department of their ability in the area of study within which the proposed research topic lies.
Hours Twenty-four hours per week for each of two semesters
Examination External and internal examination of a research thesis, and internal assessment of the coursework.
Content
A thesis embodying the results of an original investigation on a topic approved by the Head of Department and coursework as prescribed.
Note: A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours should notify the Head of the Department by 1 October in the year that 300 Level subjects are completed and must confinn this as soon as final results for the year are known. Candidates are expected to commence work on their theses after completion of their undergraduate degree studies.
HONOURS IN STATISTICS 48cp
Prerequisites 1990 Statistics III and another Part I1I subject.
Content
Students are required to take subjects worth 48 credit points of which at least 3 subjects must be chosen from Level 400 subjects offered by the Department of Statistics.
Students are also required to complete project work which can be worth 12, 18 or 24 credit points, to be detennined by consultation with the Head of the Department. The results of the project are to be presented in a thesis. The project may be a practical one involving the analysis of data, or a theoretical one. Work on the project nonnally starts early in February.
Level 400 subjects offered in 1990 are:
STAT401 Probability Theory
STA T402 Analysis of Categorical Data
STAT403
STAT404
STAT405
STAT406
STAT408
STAT409
STAT410
STAT411
Demography and Survival Analysis
Robust Regression and Smoothing
Statistical Consulting
Methods for Quality Improvement
Project (6 credit points)
Project (12 credit points)
Project (18 credit points)
Project (24 credit points)
SEC/ION SEVEN
STAT401 PROBABILITY THEORY 6cp
This is arigorous course on the mathematical theory of probability, presenting techniques and theory needed to establish limit theorems. The applications of such techniques are spread throughout the discipline of Statistics. Topics covered include: elementary measure theory, random variables, expectation, the characteristic function, modes of convergence, laws· of large numbers, centra1limit theorems, law of the iterated logarithm.
References
Billingsley, P. Probability aruJ Measure (Wiley, 1979)
Breiman, L. Probability (Addison-Wesley, 1968)
Chung, K.L A course in Probability Theory 2nd oon.(Academic Press, 1974)
Moran, P.A.P. An Introduction to Probability Theory (Oxford U. P.,l968, 1984)
STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA 6cp
The course will discuss the analysis of categorical data It will begin with a thorough coverage of 2 x 2 tables before moving on to larger (r x c) contingency tables. Topics to be covered include probability models for categorical data, measures of association, measures of agreement, the Mantel-Haenszel method for combining tables, applications of logistic regres sion and loglinear models.
References
Bishop, Y.M.M., Feinberg, S.E. et al Discrete M ultivariat e Analysis: Theory aruJ Practice (MIT Press, 1975)
Fleiss, J.L. Statistical Methods for Rates aruJ Proportions 2nd edn (Wiley, 1982)
STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND SURVIVAL 6cp ANALYSIS
This course presents a mathematical treatment of the techniques used in population projections, manpower studies, and the suIVival models used in demography and biostatistics.
Text
Lawless, J. Statistical Models aruJ Methodsfor Lifetime Data (Wiley, 1982)
References
Cox, D.R. and Oakes, D. Analysis of Survival Data (Chapman & Hall, 1984)
Elandt-Johnson, R.C. and Johnson, N.L. Survival Models and Data Analysis (Wiley, 1980)
Kalbfleisch, J.D. and Prentice, R.L. The Statistical Analysis of Failure Time Data (Wiley, 1980)
POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Keyfitz, N. Applied Mathematical Demography (Wiley, 1977)
Keyfitz, N. Introduction to the Mathematics of Population (AddisonWesley, 1968)
Pollard, J.H. Mathematical Models for the Growth of Human Populations (Cambridge V.P, 1975)
STAT404 ROBUST REGRESSION AND SMOOTHING
6cp
The main theme is the use of the computer to fit models to data when the assumptions of traditional models may not be satisfied or when it is not known in advance what form of model is appropriate. Topics to becoveredinclude: concepts of robustness, L
1-, M- and high breakdown estimation in linear regression,
scatterplot smoothers (e.g. ACE, LOESS and splines), kernel regression and methods for choosing the amount of smoothing, and radical approaches (e.g. CART and projection pursuit).
References
Eubank, RL. Spline SmoothingandNonparametric Regression (Dekker, 1988)
Hampel, F.R. Ronchetti, E.M.et a1 Robust Statistics: the Approach Based on Influence Functions (Wiley, 1986)
Rousseeuw, P.J. and Leroy, A.M. Robust Regression and Outlier Detection (Wiley, 1987)
STAT405 STATISTICAL CONSULTING 6cp
The aim of this course is to develop both the statistical and nonstatistical skills required for a successful consultant. The course includes a study of the consulting literature, a review of commonly-used statistical procedures, problem fonnulation and solving, analysis of data sets, report writing and oral presentation, role-playing and consulting with actual clients.
STAT406 METHODS FOR QUALITY IMPROVEMENT
6cp
The course will cover the concepts of total quality management, the Deming philosophy and relevant statistical techniques. Simple methods such as flow charts and Pareto diagrams will be covered, in addition to the various types of control charts and process capability analysis. Modem experimental design techniques for optimizing process petformance will be included. The course is a practical one, and the issues involved in actually implementing a quality and productivity improvement programme in an organization will be addressed.
References To be advised
101
SECTION EIGHT
LIST OF SUBJECTS
LEVEL 100 SEMESTER SUBJECTS
Number
AVIA101
AVIA102
AVIAI03
AVIA104
AVIAI05
AVIAI06
AVIAI07
AVIA108
BIOL101
BIOL102
CHEMIOI
CHEM102
COMP101
GEOGIOI
GEOGI02
GEOL101
GEOLl02
INFOIOI
MATHI01
MATHl02
MATHI03
SUbject Name Credit Points
Introductory A vianon Science 6
futroductory Aviation Engineering 6
Introductory Human Factors in Aviation 6 Introductory Aviation Management 6
Aviation Science 6 Aviation Engineering 6
Aviation Psychology & Medicine 6
Aviation Management 6
Plant & Animal Biology 6 Cell Biology. Genetics & Evolution 6
Chemistry 101 6 Chemistry 102 6 Computer Science 1 12
Introduction to Physical Geography 6
Introduction to Human Geography 6
The Environment 6 Earth Materials 6 Introduction to Infonnation Systems 6
Mathematics 101 6 Mathematics 102 6
Mathematics 103 6
MATHl99 Transition Mathematics
(=Mathematics 102 pre-1990) o
102
PHYSIOI Physics 101
PHYS102 Physics 102
PHYSI03 Physics 103 PSYCI01 Psychology Introduction 1 PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 STA TIOt Introductory Statistics
LEVEL 200 SEMESTER SUBJECTS
A VIA201 Aviation Meteorology. Navigation
& Instruments A VIA202 Principles of Flight, & Jet Aircraft
Perfonnance A VIA203 Human Factors in Aviation
A VIA204 Meteorology & High Speed!
AVIA205
AVIA206
BIOL201
BIOL202
BIOL203
BIOL204
BIOL205
BIOL206
High Altitude Navigation Aerodynamics, Engines & Aircraft Systems A vialion Instruction Biochemistry Animal Physiology Population Dynamics Cell & Molecular Biology
Molecular Genetics Plant Physiology
6 6
6 6
6
6
6
6
6
6 6 6 6
6
6
6 6 6
SECfION EIGHT
CHEM201 Analytical Chemistry
CHEM202 Inorganic Chemistry CHEM203 Organic Chemistry CHEM204 Physical Otemistry CHEM205 Applied Chemistry 205
CHEM206 Applied Chemistry 206
COMP201 Advanced Data Structures
COMP202 Computer Architecture
COMP203 Assembly Language
6
6
6
6 6
6
3
3 3
COMP204 Programming Language Semantics 3
COMP205 Programming in C COMP206
COMP241
EDUC211
EDUC212
GEOG201
GEOG202
GEOG203
GEOG204
GEOG205
GEOG206
GEOL201
GEOL202
GEOL203
GEOL204 GEOL205
GEOL206
GEOL207
MATH201
MATH202
MATH203
MATH204
MATH205
MATH206
MATH207
MATH208
MATH209
MATH210
MATH211
MATH212
MATH213 MATH214
MATH215
MATH216
PHYS201
PHYS202
Theory of Computation Cognitive Science
Mathematics Education 211 Mathematics Education 212 Methods in Physical Geography Methods in Human Geography Biogeography and Climatology Geomorphology of Australia Contemporary Australia & East Asia Socia-Economic Geography Mineralogy Petrology Palaeoenvironments
Structural & Resource Geology
Geology Field Course 205
Geology Field Course 206
Geology Field Course 207
Multivariable Calculus
Partial Differential Equations 1
Ordinary Differential Equations 1
Real Analysis
Analysis - Metric Spaces
Complex Analysis 1
Complex Analysis 2
Linear Algebra 1
Linear Algebra 2
Geometry 1
Group Theory
Discrete Mathematics
Mathematical Modelling
Mechanics
Operations Research
Numerical Analysis
Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism
Mechanics & Thermal Physics
PHYS203 Solid SlaI:e & Atomic Physics
PHYS204 Electronics & Instrumentation
PSYC201 Foundations for Psychology
PSYC202 Basic Processes
3
3
6 6
6
6 6
6
6
6
6
6
3
6 3
6
6
6
3
3 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 3
3
3
3
3
3 6 6
6
6
6
6
LIST OF SUBJECTS
PSYC203 Developmental & Social Processes 6 6 6 6
6
6 3 3 3
PSYC204 Individual Processes
PSYC205 Applied Topics in Psychology 1
PSYC206 Applied Topics in Psychology 2
STA 1'201 Mathematical Statistics
STA1'202 Regression Analysis
ST A 1'203 Queues and Simulation
STA 1'204 Non-parametric Statistics
STA 1'205 Engineering Statistics
LEVEL 300 SEMESTER SUBJECTS
AVIA301
AVIA302
AVIA303
AVIA304
BI0L301
BI0L302
BI0L303
B10L304
BI0L305
BIOL306
BI0L307
BI0L308
BI0L309
CHEM301
CHEM302
CHEM303
CHEM304
CHEM305
CHEM306
CHEM307
CHEM308
COMP301
COMP302
COMP303
COMP304
COMP305
COMP306
COMP307 COMP308
EDUC311
Advanced Aviation Engineering
& Structures
Advanced Aircraft Operations
& Meteorology
Aviation Engineering & Supersonic
Aerodynamics
Advanced Navigation & Meteorology
Cell Processes
Reproductive Physiology
Environmental Plant Physiology
Whole Plant Development
Immunology
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6 6
Ecology & Evolution 6
Molecular Biology of Plant Development 6
Mammalian Development 6
Molecular Biology 6
Instrument Analysis & Cluomatography 6
Trace Analysis & Chemometrics 6
Coordination & Organometallic Chemistry 6
Bioinorganic & Cluster Chemistry 6
Mechanistic & Synthetic Organic Chemistry 6
Heterocyclic & Biological Organic
Chemistry 6
Electrodics & Quantum Chemistry 6
Photoelectron Spectroscopy &
Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion 6
Compiler Design 6
Artificial Intelligence 6
Computer Networks 6
Database Design 6
Design and Analysis of Algorilhms 6
Computer Graphics 6
Software Engineering Principles 6 Operating Systems 6
Mathematics Education 311 6
EDUC312 Mathematics Education 312 6
G8OO301 Advanced Methods in Physical Geography 6
G8OO302 Advanced Methods in Human Geography 6
GEOG303 Geography of Aboriginal Australia 6
103
SECTION EIGHT LIST OF SUBJECTS
Number SUbject Name Credit LEVEL 400 SEMESTER SUBJECTS Points
GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation 6 BIOLAOI Biology Honours 40) 24
GEOG305 Climatic Problems 6 BIOLA02 Biology Honours 402 24
GEOG306 Geography of Australia: An Historical CHEM401 Chemistry Honours 401 24
Perspective 6 CHEM402 Chemistry Honours 402 24
GEOG307 The Hydrosphere 6 GEOG401 Geography Honours 401 24
GEOG308 Basic Needs & Patterns of Inequality 6 GEOG402 Geography Honours 402 24
GOOLJOl Earth Processes 1 6 GEOLAOI Geology Honours 401 24
GooLJ02 Earth Processes 2 6 GEOLA02 Geology Honours 402 24
GooLJ03 Earth Materials 1 6 MATH401 MaUtematics Honours 401 24
GOOLJ04 Earth Materials 2 6 MATH402 Mathematics Honours 402 24
GOOLJ05 Earth Resources 12 PHYS401 Physics Honours 401 24
GOOLJ06 Applied Geology 12 PHYS402 Physics Honours 402 24
MATH301 Logic & Set Theory 6 PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401 24
MATH302 General Tensors and Relativity 6 PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402 24
MATH303 Variational Methods & Integral Equations 6 PSYC403 Psychology 403 16
MATH304 Ordinary Differential Equations 2 6 PSYC404 Psychology 404 32
MATH305 Partial Differential Equations 2 6 STAT401 Probability Theory 6
MATH306 Fluid Mechanics 6 STAT402 Analysis of Categorical Data 6
MATH307 Quantum & Statistical Mechanics 6 STAT403 Demography and Survival Analysis 6
MATH308 Geometry 2 6 STAT404 Robust Regression and Smoothing 6
MATH309 Combinatorics 6 STAT405 Statistical Consulting 6
MATH310 Functional Analysis 6 STAT406 MeUtods for Q.tality Improvement 6
MATH311 Measure Theory and Integration 6 STAT408 Project 6
MATH312 Algebra 6 STAT409 Project 12
MATH313 Numerical Analysis (Theory) 6 STAT410 Project 18
MATH314 Optimization 6 STAT411 Project 24
MATH315 Mathematical Biology 6
MATH316 Industrial Modelling 6
MATH317 Number Theory 6
PHYS301 Mathematical Methods &
Quantum Mechanics 6
PHYS302 Electromagnetism & Electronics 6
PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular & Solid Stale Physics 6
PHYS304 Statistical Physics & Relativity 6
PHYS305 Nuclear Physics & Advanced Electromagnetism 6
PSYeJOl Advanced Foundations for Psychology 6
PSYeJ02 Independent Project 6
PSYeJ03 Advanced Basic Processes 1 6
PSYeJ04 Advanced Basic Processes 2 6
PSYeJ05 Individual Processes 6
PSYeJ06 Advanced Social Processes 6
PSYeJ07 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 6
PSYeJ08 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2 6
STATIOI Statistical Inference 6
STATI02 Study Design 6 STATI03 Generalized Linear Models 6 STATI04 Time Series Analysis 6
104
, c
& AI- \._~,.o ~ t \. .-- 1'50 200 250 met, ...
,
f ;;~1\~¥1}:;~;';~{}"
THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE CAMPUS MAP
SITE GUIDE by BUILDING NUMBER N Architecture A McMullin p Drama Theatre
Administration· Arts Q Drama Studio Student Services - Cashier R Social Sciences Computing Centre - EEO Geogmphy - Drama
Social Sciences Community Programmes Commerce - Economics AN Central Animal House Law - Management AS Central Animal Store
SB Post Office B Ledure Theatre BOI SC Auchmuty Sports Centre C Geology SH SlaffHouse CB Commonwealth Bank SP Sports Pavilion CC Child Care Centre (Kintaiha)
Squash Courts - Oval No.2 CG Central Garage TA Turua Annexe CT Computer Teacbing TB Temporary Buildings 0 Physics
Careers & Student Employment E Lecture Tbeatre EO! Chaplain, - Sport & Recreation EA Engineering Administration Student Accommodation EB Cbemical & Materials
TC Tennis Courts Engineering TH The Hunter Technology EC Mechanical Engineering
Development Centre ED Civil Engineering & U Union Surveying V Mathematics EE Electrical & Computer
Computer Science - Statistics Engineering Radio station 2NUR-FM EF Engineering Classrooms
W Behavioural Sciences EG Bulk Solids Engineering Education - Psychology ES Engineering Science Sociology G Chemistry
GH Great Hall H Baselen Theatre HOI HA·HZ Edwards Hall HHA·HHF Hunter House I Medical Sciences Lecture
Tbeatre K202 IA·IE International House J Biological Sciences K Medical Sciences L Auchmuty Library M Cbemical & Materials
Engineering
, , ,
, , ,"---
~
ALPHABETICAL LOCATION GUIDE
Administration in McMullin A Animal House--Central AN Arts in McMu!Iin A Architecture N Basden Theatre HOI H Behavioural Sciences W Biological Sciences J BOI Lecture Theatre B Bulk Solids Engineering EG Careers & Student Employment in Temp. Bldgs TB
Cashier in MCMullin A Central Garage CG Materials Engineering in Chemical & Materials Engineering M
Chemistry G Chaplains in Temp. Bldg' TB Chemical & Materials Eng. EB Child Care Centre (Kintaiba) CC Civil Eng. & Surveying ED Commerce in Social Sciences S Commonwealth Bank CB Community Programmes in McMullin A
Computer Science in Mathematics V Computing Centre in McMullin A Computer Teaching Building CT Drama in Social Sciences R Drama Studio Q Drama Theatre P Economics in Social Sciences S Education in Behavioural Sciences W Edwards Hall Administration & Dining HA Burnett House HB Cutler House HC Self-catering Houses HF·HZ
EEO in McMu!Iin A ElectriCal & Computer Eng. EE
__ ------"i , , , , , ,
;~"",
,/
, , , ,
/
, , , , , , ,
/ /
, , "
Engineering Administration Engineering Classrooms Engineering Science EOI Lecture Theatre Geography in Social Sciences Geology Great Hall Hunter House International House Stage I Stage 2
K202 Medical Sciences Lecture Theatre
Law in Social Sciences Library-Auchmuty McMullin Management in Social Sciences Mathematics Mechanical Engineering Medical Sciences Physics Post Office Psycbology in Social Sciences Radio Station 2NUR.FM in Mathematics
Sociology in Social Sciences Sports Centre-Aucbmuty Sports Pavilion
, , , ,
INDEX
EA EF ES E R C GH
HHA·HHF
IA·IC ID ·IE
I S L A S V EC K D SB W
V W SC SP
Sport & Recreation in Tem~. ~ldgs TB Squash Courts in Sports Pavilion SP Staff House SH Statistics in Mathematics V Student Accommodation in Temporuy Building, TB
Student Services in McMullin A The Hunter Technology Development Centre TH Temporary Buildings TB Tennis Courts TC Tunra Annexe TA Union U